Skip to main content

Full text of "The pronunciation of English: 1. Phonetics; 2. Phonetic transcriptions"

See other formats


CAMBRIDGE  J^ 

PRIMERS   OF    PRONUNCIATION 

Edited  by  Daniel  Jones 


The   Pronunciation  of  English 


CAMBRIDGE    UNIVERSITY    PRESS 

C.    F.    CLAY,    Manager 

Eontion:    FETTER    LANE,    E.G. 

lElrinliurffi) :    roo   PRINCES  STREET 


f.thJ  l^ovl;:    G.  P.  PUTNAM'S  SONS 

eombnK  nun  CTnlcuUn:     MACMIIJ.AN  AND  Co.,  Lto. 

BToronto:    J.   M.   DENT  AND  SONS,   Ltd, 

BTokjJo:    THE  MARUZEN-KABUSHIKI-KAISHA 


All  rights  reserved 


^  The 

Pronunciation  of  English 

i.     Phonetics 
ii.     Phonetic  Transcriptions 

by 

Daniel  Jones,   M.A. 

Lecturer    m   Phonetics  at  University  College,  London 


SECOND  EDITION 


Cambridge 

at  the  University  Press 

1914 


First  Edition  1909 
Reprinted  1909,  1911 
Second  Edition  1914 


Pf 


35 


Jt7 


PREFACE 

TN  studying  the  pronunciation  of  a  language  two  things 
-^  are  necessary,  firstly  to  acquire  familiarity  with  the 
variou8_elementary  speech_Simnds  of  which  the  language 
is  composed  and  the  modes  of  producing  them,  and 
secondly  to  learn  when  and  in  what  combinations  the 
elementary  sounds  are  used  so  as  to  form  words  and 
sentences. 

This  book  is  accordingly  divided  into  two  parts.  Part  I 
dealing  with  phonetics  proper,  that  is  the  analysis  and 
classification  of  the  elementary  speech  sounds  of  the 
English  language,  Part  II  consisting  of  phonetic  tran- 
scriptions of  passages  selected  from  well-known  English 
authors.  In  Part  I  Educated  Southern  English  pronun- 
ciation is  dealt  with  in  detail  and  the  principal  varieties 
of  pronunciation  heard  in  London  and  elsewhere  are 
described.  Part  II  contains  specimens  of  various  kinds 
of  pronunciation  and  is  divided  into  five  sections.  Sec- 
tions I,  II  and  III  contain  transcriptions  of  average 
Standard  English  (as  defined  in  Part  I,  §  1),  illustrating 
the  careful  conversational,  the  rapid  conversational,  and 
the  declamatory  styles  of  pronunciation  respectively; 
section  iv  contains  transcriptions  of  the  actual  pronun- 
ciation of  various  educated  persons  from  different  parts 


VI  PREFACE 

of  the   country;    section   v   consists    of   a  specimen   of 
uneducated  London  dialect. 

The  phonetic  system  used  is  that  of  the  International 
Phonetic  Association,  and  the  symbols  are  fully  explained 
in  Part  I.  The  ordinary  spelling  of  the  pieces  transcribed 
is  given  at  the  end  for  reference. 

I  have  to  thank  the  following  authors  and  publishers 
for  kindly  allowing  me  to  reproduce  copyright  matter: 
Messrs  Sampson  Low,  Marston  &  Co.  for  the  illustrations 
of  the  Larynx  (fig.  2)  which  are  taken  from  Voice,  Song 
and  Speech  by  Browne  and  Behnke,  Messrs  George  Bell 
&  Sons  for  the  poem  of  Calverley  (no.  3),  Mr  Benson  and 
his  publishers  Messrs  Methuen  for  the  passage  from  Dodo 
(no.  9),  Dr  Fuhrken  and  Dr  Rodhe  for  the  transcription 
from  Fuhrken- Jespersen-Rodhe's  Engelsk  Ldsehok  (no.  17), 
Messrs  Macmillan  &  Co.  for  the  passage  of  Huxley  (no.  19), 
Messrs  Teubner  for  the  transcription  from  Lloyd's  Northern 
English  (no.  20),  and  Mr  Pett  Ridge  for  the  passage  from 
his  London  Only  (no.  26). 

1  also  wish  to  express  my  thanks  to  Mr  G.  Noel- 
Armfield  (London),  Dr  E.  R.  Edwards  (London),  Mr  H.  D. 
Ellis  (London),  Mr  B.  Lockhart  (Scotland),  and  Miss 
B.  Robson  (Edinburgh),  for  their  kindness  in  furnishing 
me  with  transcriptions  of  their  respective  pronunciations 
(nos.  16,  18,  19,  22  and  24  respectively)  and  giving  me 
information  for  the  notes  which  are  placed  after  each 
transcription.  I  am  also  indebted  to  Dr  G.  E.  Fuhrken, 
the  transcriber  of  no.  17  mentioned  above,  for  information 
regarding  his  pronunciation.  Special  thanks  are  also  due 
to  Mr  Noel-Armfield,  who  was  kind  enough  to  make  the 


PREFACE  VU 

transcriptions  of  the  pronunciation  of  Mr  R.  P.  H.  Blore 
(no.  21),  Mr  J  H.  Fadge  (no.  23)  and  Mr  J.  Sinclair 
(no.  25)  (whose  kindness  in  allowing  their  pronunciation 
to  be  recorded  I  also  desire  to  acknowledge)  and  to  furnish 
me  with  notes  on  their  pronunciation. 

The  present  work  is  primarily  designed  for  the  use  of 
English  students  and  teachers,  and  more  especially  for 
students  in  training-colleges  and  teachers  whose  aim  is 
to  correct  cockneyisms  or  other  undesirable  pronuncia- 
tion in  their  scholars.  At  the  same  time  it  is  hoped  that 
the  book  may  be  found  of  use  to  lecturers,  barristers, 
clergy,  etc.,  in  short  to  all  who  desire  to  read  or  speak 
in  public.  The  dialectal  peculiarities,  indistinctness  and 
artificialities  which  are  unfortunately  so  common  in  the 
pronunciation  of  public  speakers  may  be  avoided  by  the 
application  of  the  elementary  principles  of  phonetics.  It 
may  be  added  that  a  study  of  the  pronunciation  of  the 
mother  tongue  is  the  indispensable  foundation  for  the  ac- 
quisition of  the  correct  pronunciation  of  foreign  languages. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  urge  further  reasons  why  English 
people  should  be  encouraged  to  study  the  pronunciation 
of  their  own  language.  The  fact  that  the  Board  of 
Education  has  now  introduced  the  subject  into  the 
regular  course  of  training  of  teachers  for  service  in 
public  elementary  schools  is  sufi&cient  proof  that  its 
importance  is  now  generally  recognised. 

DANIEL  JONES. 

Wimbledon, 
Aprily  1909. 


PEEFACE  TO  THE  SECOND  EDITION 

TN  the  second  edition  of  this  book  alterations  have  been 
-*-  made  in  the  definition  of  a  vowel  (§  12)  and  in  the 
classification  of  vowels  (pp.  10,  11  and  §  129).  Several 
corrections  have  also  been  made  in  the  intonation-curves 
on  pp.  87 — 97.  Otherwise  the  book  remains  substantially 
as  before. 

Gramophone  Records  of  Texts  8  and  9  have  recently 
been  prepared,  and  it  is  hoped  that  they  may  be  of 
assistance  to  those  readers  who  have  access  to  gramo- 
phones. They  are  spoken  by  myself  and  are  published 
by  the  Deutsche  Grammophon-Gesellschaft,  Rittcrstr.  35, 
Berlin.  The  catalogue  numbers  of  the  records  are  201392 
and  201393  respectively.  (For  the  benefit  of  Indian 
readers  it  may  be  added  that  the  records  are  stocked  at 
Spencers  Stores,  Madras.) 

A  few  discrepancies  between  the  pronunciation  on  the 
records  and  that  indicated  in  the  texts  will  be  noticed. 
These  are  chiefly  due  to  the  fact  that  in  making  a  gramo- 
phone record  it  is  necessary  to  speak  with  exaggerated 
distinctness.     A  study  of  such  discrepancies  is  instructive. 


DANIEL  JONES. 


University  College, 
London,  W.C. 

Augustf  1914. 


CONTENTS 

SECTION  PAGE 

Preface v 

Table  of  English  Speech  Sounds  ....  xiii 

Values  of  phonetic  symbols xiv 

Abbreviations xvii 

Script  forms  of  phonetic  symbols  and  specimens  of 

phonetic  writing xviii 


PART   I:    PHONETICS 

I.  Standard  pronunciation 1 

II.  Organs  of  Speech : 

General  remarks 2 

Vocal  chords.     Breath  and  Voice     ...  3 

III.  Classification  of  Sounds  : 

General  remarks.     Definitions  of  Vowels  and 

Consonants        ......  6 

Classification  of  Consonants     ....  7 

Classification  of  Vowels 9 

IV.  English  Speech-sounds  in  detail : 

General  remarks 14 

Consonants :  Plosives 15 

Liquids 19 

Fricatives 28 

Semi- Vowels 33 

Vowels 34 

V.  Nasalisation 48 

a5 


X 

CONTENTS 

SECTION 

PAOE 

VI. 

Assimilation 49 

VIL 

Quantity 

52 

VIII. 

Syllables 

65 

IX. 

Stress 

57 

X. 

Breath -groups . 

58 

XI. 

Intonation       .... 

69 

XII. 

Theory  of  Plosive  Consonants. 

65 

XIII. 

Initial  and  Final  Voiced  Fricatives 

69 

PART   II:    PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 

I.  Standard  Pronunciation.    A.   Careful  Conversational 

Style  : 

1.  Bronte,  a  passage  from  Jane  Eyrej     ,        ,  73 

2.  Burke,  a  passage   from   Thoughts   on  the 
French  Revolution 74 

3.  Calverlet,  Contentment  (after  the  manner 

of  Horace) 75 

4.  Scott,  Hunting  Song 77 

5.  Thackeray,  a  passage  from  the  Essay  on 
Whitebait 79 

6.  yfoB.T>&YfORTB^**  I  wandered  lonely"     .        ,  82 

II.  Standard  Pronunciation.     B.    Rapid  Conversational 

Style : 

7.  Dickens,  a  passage  from  the  Pickwick  Papers         83 

8.  George  Eliot,  a  passage  from  the  MiU  on 

the  Floss 85 

9.  Benson,  a  passage  from  Dodo  (with  Intona- 
tion Curves) 87 


CONTENTS  XI 

SKCTION  PAOJfi 

III.  Standard  Pronunciation.     C.    Declamatory  Stylo : 

10.  Byron,  a  passage  from  Childe  Harold  .        .  98 

11.  Gladstone,  Peroration  of  the  Speech  on  the 
Second  Reading  of  the  Reform  Bill  of  1866      .  99 

12.  Keats,  Sonnet  to  Sleep         ....        101 

13.  Milton,  At  a  Solemn  Music  ....        102 

14.  Shakespeare,  a  passage  from  Julius  Caesar        103 

16.     Tennyson,  Lyrics  from  The  Princess  (with 

Intonation  Curves)  .        .        ...        .        .        104 

IV.  Pronunciation  of  particular  speakers  : 

16.  Addison,  a  passage  from  Sir  Roger  de  Cover- 
ley^  s  country  residev/ie  and  friends  (pronuncia- 
tion of  G.  Noel-Armfield,  Esq.,  Yorkshire  and 
London)    .         . 108 

Notes  on  Mr  No6l- Arm  field's  pronunciation        .        109 

17.  Fuhrken-Jespersen-Rodhe,  anecdote  taken 
from  Fuhrken's  transcription  of  Jespersen- 
Rodhe's  Engelsk  Ldsebok  (pronunciation  of  G. 

E.  Fuhrken,  Esq.,  London)       .         .         .         .         Ill 

Notes  on  Dr  Fuhrken's  pronunciation         .         .         112 

18.  Goldsmith,  a  passage  from  Beau  Tibbs  at 
Vauxhall  (pronunciation  of  Dr  E.  R.  Edwards, 
London) 112 

Notes  on  Dr  Edwards'  pronunciation  .        .        .         113 

19.  lluxLEY,  a  passage  from  Discourses  Biological 
and  Geological  (pronunciation  of  H.  D.  Ellis, 

Esq.,  Devonshire  and  London)         .        .        .         114 
Notes  on  Mr  Ellis'  pronunciation        .         .         .         114 

20.  Lloyd,  a  passage  from  the  Daily  Mail  as 
transcribed  in  Lloyd's  Northern  English  (pro- 
nunciation of  R.  J.  Lloyd,  Esq.,  Liverpool)     .         115 

Notes  on  Dr  Lloyd's  pronunciation     .        .        .        117 


XU  CONTENTS 

SECTION  I'AUK 

21.  Macaulay,  a  passage  from  the  History  of 
England  (pronunciation  of  R  P.  Houghton 
Blore,  Esq.,  Lancashire  and  London)       .        .         118 

Notes  on  Mr  Blore's  pronunciation     .        .        .        118 

22.  Macaulay,  a  passage  from  the  History  of 
England  (pronunciation  of  B.  Lockhart,  Esq., 
Scotland  and  South  of  England)      .        .        .        119 

Notes  on  Mr  Lockhart's  pronunciation       .        .         120 

23.  Buskin,  a  passage  from  Modern  Painters 
(pronunciation  of  J.  H.  Fudge,  Esq.,  Hamp- 
shire and  London) 120 

Notes  on  Mr  Fudge's  pronunciation    .        .        .        121 

24.  Scott,  a  passage  from  Old  Mortality  (pro- 
nunciation of  Miss  B.  Robson,  Edinburgh)      .        122 

Notes  on  Miss  Robson's  pronunciation       .        .        123 

25.  Stevenson,  a  passage  from  Treasure  Island 
(pronunciation  of  J.  Sinclair,  Esq.,  Glasgow)  .        124 

Notes  on  Mr  Sinclair's  pronunciation .        .        .        124 

V.      London  Dialect : 

26.  Pett  Ridge,  a  passage  from  London  Only    .        126 

Appendix.     Ordinary  spelling  of  the  pieces  transcribed  in 

Part  II 129 


TABLE   OF   ENGLISH    SPEECH   SOUNDS 

This  table  is  for  reference  only.  It  should  be  used 
constantly  in  connexion  with  the  detailed  descriptions  of 
the  sounds,  Part  I,  §§  29  ff. 


Glot- 
tal 

1 

1 

Velar 

o: 
^1 

P 

3 

£ 

1  ^ 

1 

O 
0) 

<l> 

> 

8-* 

■^ 

'3 

1 

•Ml 

C 

f— t 

t« 

2>. 

CD  P 

1- 

■11 

> 

(Hi 

I 

1 

! 

0*1 

a 

^ 

.^. 
5 

^ 

J. 

> 

'i 

1 

J 

1 
1 

1 

-1 

1 

tri 

1 

o 

s(juisuosno;3 

S|8M0^ 

The  sounds  underlined  in  the  table  are  breathed,  all 
others  are  voiced  (§  9). 

Sounds  which  appear  twice  in  the  table  have  a  double 
articulation,  the  secondary  articulation  being  shown  by 
the  symbol  in  (  );  see  the  sections  relating  to  each  of 
the  sounds  in  question. 


VALUES   OF  PHONETIC   SYMBOLS 

The  following  key  words  are  in  StP  as   defined  in 
Part  I,  §^  1,  2. 


Phonetic 

Ordinary 

Phonetic 

Symbols 

Spelling 

Transcription 

a:  heard  in  father 

'fCLlSa 

a 

COW 

kau  (see  §  135) 

a 

„    % 

flai 

SB 

cab 

kaeb 

A 

,         mwch 

mAt/ 

b 

6oat 

bout 

d 

rfay 

dei 

$ 

then 

Sen 

e         , 

,         red 

red 

ci 

play 

plei 

e 

,         there 

Sea 

a: 

,         bird 

ba:d            

a 

,       above,china  a'bAvr^tJama/ 

f 

,        /cot 

fut 

g 

^ive 

qiv 

h 

hurt 

h9:t 

i: 

,         queen 

kwi;n 

i 

„        Hp 

lip 

J 

»,       yon 

i^- 

VALUES   OF   PHONETIC   SYMBOLS  XV 


Phonetic 

Ordinary 

Phonetic 

Symbols 

Spelling       T 

ranscriptioii 

k  heard 

in   cold 

kould 

1 

>: 

/eap,  fee^ 

li:p,  fill  (see  §  62) 

m 

» 

mark 

maik 

n 

» 

new 

nju; 

D 

» 

son^ 

sor) 

(low 

INoveiaber 

lou 

o 

J» 

no'vemba  (see  §  150) 

o: 

JJ 

saw 

so: 

o 

)} 

long 

lor) 

P 

„ 

pay 

pei 

r 

» 

right 

rait  (see  §  69) 

s 

» 

sun 

SAn 

/ 

» 

show 

Jou 

t 

„ 

too 

tu: 

e 

,, 

thin 

ein 

u: 

» 

food 

fu:d 

u 

,, 

good 

gud 

V 

»J 

vow- 

VCLU 

w 

» 

wine 

wain 

z 

» 

2:eal 

ziil 

3 

)» 

measure 

'meja 

'  means  that  the  following  syllable  is  stressed,  e.g. 
above  aTjAV,  measure  'mesa. 

,  placed  under  a  consonant  symbol,  as  in  n,  ],  means 
that  the  consonant  is  syllabic.  It  is  not  usually 
necessary  to  insert  this  mark ;  see  §  199. 

The  foregoing  symbols  are  those  used  in  the  tran- 
scription of  ordinary  Standard  English.  The  following 
are  required  in  exceptional  cases  for  indicating  variations 
from  the  normal  pronunciation. 


XVI  VALUES   OF   PHONETIC   SYMBOLS 

A,  the  open  back  unrounded  vowel,  §  130 
a:,  a  lengthened  a,  §  126 

d,  a  vowel  intermediate  between  a:  and  a,  §  175 
®>        »  „  H        SB     „    a,  §175 
as:,  a  lengthened  aB,  §  100 
e:,  the  half-closed  front  tense  unrounded  vowel,  §§  117, 119 

e,  the  half-closed  mixed  lax  unrounded  vowel,  §  153 
e:,  a  lengthened  6 
a,  a  vowel  intermediate  between  a:  and  a,  §  175  j 
a-ri,  a  lowered  variety  of  a:,  §  167  | 
axi,  a  raised  variety  of  a:,  §  167 

1,  the  closed  mixed  lax  unrounded  vowel,  §  158  i 

I,  a  vowel  intermediate  between  i  and  e,  §  111  . 

o:,  the  half-closed  back  tense  rounded  vowel,  §  151  j 

o,  the  half-closed  mixed  lax  rounded  vowel,  §  153  i 

Q,  a  vowel  intermediate  between  o  and  a,  §  175  \ 

OB,  the  half-open  front  rounded  vowel,  §  153 
in,  the  closed  back  lax  unrounded  vowel,  §  157 
ii,  the  closed  mixed  lax  rounded  vowel,  ^  153,  158 
a 


vowels  pronounced  with  "  inversion  "  of  the  tip  of  the 
tongue,  §  71 


nasalised  vowels,  §§  25,  180 


I 
5 

ft 

?,  the  glottal  plosive,  §  47 

c,  the  breathed  palatal  plosive,  §  46 

f,  the  voiced  palatal  plosive,  §  46 


VALUES   OF   PHONETIC   SYMBOLS  XVIJ 


9,  the  breathed  palatal  fricative,  §  99 
V  L  devocalised  d,  v,  z,  §§  238,  239 


m 

o 

n 

o 

r 


.,  devocalised  1,  m,  n,  r,  j,  §§  14,  51,  55,  185 


1",  1',  1'  etc.,  varieties  of  1  sounds,  §  Gl 

f ,  the  semirolled  r  sound,  §  69  note 

J,  the  fricative  r  sound,  §  69 

B,  the  uvular  r  sound,  §  73 

J^,  a  sound  intermediate  between  /  and  j,  §  101 

5',     ......  »    3  "  i'  §  101 

v^,  a  semivocalic  v,  §  77 

AV,  the  breathed  w  sound,  §  81 


LIST   OF   ABBREVIATIONS 


L  London  dialect 

N  Northern  dialects  (Lancashire,  etc.) 

N.Eng.  The  North  of  England 

N.Mid.  North  Midland  dialects 

Sc  Scottish  dialects 

S.Eng.  The  South  of  England 

StP  The  form  of  Standard  Pronunciation  described 

in  Part  I,  §  2 

W  Western  dialects  (Devon,  etc.) 


SCRIPT  FORMS   OF  PHONETIC  SYMBOLS 


a  a,  ^   y 


a  a. 


r    7*'   {or  It  when  no  con- 
fusion can  arise) 


e    t      * 


// 


o    ^  z    z. 


SPECIMENS   OF   PHONETIC  WRITING 

c^J<ccl  -^  /ccyiy^^^^  ^TT  66:o?j.  /cI/Pto  ^71x6  yctUjC 

(Sweet.) 

(Sweet.) 

Many  prefer   to  write  :  as  .«^,  as   in   the   following 
example. 

(Ellis.) 


PART  I 

PHONETICS 


L     STANDARD   PRONUNCIATION 

1.  No  two  persons  pronounce  exactly  alike.  The 
differences  may  arise  from  a  variety  of  causes,  such  as 
locality,  early  influences,  social  surroundings,  individual 
peculiarities,  and  the  like.  For  the  purposes  of  the 
present  book  it  is  necessary  to.  set  up  a  standard,  and 
the  standard  selected  is  the  pronunciation  which  appears 
to  be  most  usually  employed  by  Southern  English  persons 
who  have  been  educated  at  the  great  public  boarding- 
schools.  Where  such  usage  varies,  the  style  adopted  by 
the  majority  will  be  preferred. 

2.  But  here  it  must  be  noticed  that  even  the  best 
speakers  commonly  use  more  than  one  style.  There  is 
the  rapid  colloquial  style  and  the  formal  oratorical  style, 
and  there  are  many  shades  between  the  two  extremes. 
For  our  standard  pronunciation  we  shall  adopt  in  Part  I 
of  this  book  an  intermediate  style,  which  may  be  termed 
the  careful  conversational  style.  This  form  of  standard 
pronunciation  will  be  denoted  by  the  abbreviation  StP,  and 
it  will  be  understood  that  whenever  phonetic  transcription 
is  used,  StP  is  intended  to  be  represented,  unless  the 
contrary  is  stated.  Students  should  note  carefully  all 
points  in  which  their  own  pronunciation  differs  from  StP. 

J.  1 


PHONETICS 


11.     ORGANS   OF   SPEECH 

3.  The  first  essential  for  the  student  of  Phonetics  is 
to  have  a  clear  idea  of  the  structure  and  functions  of  the 
various  parts  of  the  organs  of  speech.  Those  who  have 
not  already  done  so,  should  make  a  thorough  examination 
of  the  inside  of  their  mouth  by  means  of  a  hand  looking- 
glass.  The  best  way  of  doing  this  is  to  stand  with  the 
back  to  the  light  and  to  hold  the  looking-glass  in  such  a 
position  that  it  reflects  the  light  into  the  mouth,  and  at 
the  same  time  enables  the  observer  to  see  the  interior 
thus  illuminated.  It  is  not  difficult  to  find  the  right 
position  for  the  glass. 

4.  The  following  diagram  shows  all  that  is  required 
for  the  purposes  of  this  book. 


B.  Back  of  Tongue. 

Bl.  Blade  of  Tongue. 

F.  Front  of  Tongue. 

G.  Upper  Gums. 

Gt.  Gullet  (food  passage). 

H.  Hard  Palate. 

LL.  Lips. 

P.  Pbaryngal  cavity  (Pharynx). 

S.  Soft  Palate. 

TT.  Teeth. 

U.  Uvula. 

V.  Position  of  Vocal  Chords. 

W,  Wind-pipe, 


Fig.  1.    The  Organs  of  Speech. 


ORGANS   OF   SPEECH  3 

6.  Note  that  the  main  part  of  the  roof  of  the  mouth 
is  divided  into  two  parts,  the  front  part  constituting  the 
hatd  palate,  and  the  back  part  the  soft  palate.  These 
two  parts  should  be  examined  carefully  in  the  looking- 
glass.  They  may  be  felt  by  the  tongue  or  with  the  finger. 
The  soft  palate  can  be  moved  upwards  from  the  position 
shown  in  fig.  1.  When  raised  to  its  fullest  extent  it 
touches  the  back  wall  of  the  pharynx,  as  in  fig.  5  (p.  11). 
The  upper  gums  are  defined  as  the  part  of  the  roof  of 
the  mouth  which  is  convex  to  the  tongue,  the  imaginary 
division  between  the  gums  and  hard  palate  being  made  at 
the  point  where  the  roof  of  the  mouth  ceases  to  be  convex 
to  the  tongue,  and  begins  to  be  concave. 

6.  Note  particularly  the  meaning  of  the  terms  back 
and  front,  as  applied  to  the  tongue.  The  back  is  the  part 
opposite  the  soft  palate  when  the  tongue  is  in  the  position 
of  rest,  the  front  is  the  part  opposite  the  hard  palate. 
The  blade  is  the  part  opposite  the  gums,  and  includes  the 
tip. 

THE   VOCAL   CHOEDS.      BEEATH  AND  VOICE 

7.  The  vocal  chords  are  situated  in  the  larynx  and 
resemble  two  lips.  They  run  in  a  horizontal  direction 
from  back  to  front  (see  figs.  1  and  2).  The  space  between 
them  is  called  the  glottis.  The  chords  may  be  kept  apart, 
or  they  may  be  brought  together  so  as  to  close  the  air 
passage  completely.  When  they  are  brought  close  together 
and  air  is  forced  between  them,  they  vibrate,  producing 
the  sound  known  as  voice.  When  they  are  wide  apart 
and  air  passes  between  them,  the  sound  produced  is  called 
BREATH.     Certain  intermediate  states  of  the  glottis  give 

1—2 


4 


PHONETICS 


rise  to  whisper.   The  sound  h  (§  102)  is  pure  breath ;  the 
vowel  sounds  are  practically  pure  voice. 


Fron^ 


Fronf 


Back  B 

Back 
Fig.  2.     The  Larynx  as  seen  through  the  laryngoscope. 
A.    Position  for  Breath.      B.    Position  for  Voice. 
TT.   Tongue.     VV.  Vocal  Chords,    W.  Windpipe. 

8.  Breath  and  voice  may  be  illustrated  artificially  by 
the  following  simple  experiment.  Take  a  short  tube  of 
wood  or  glass  T,  say  1 J  inches  long  and  \  inch  in  diameter, 
and  tie  on  to  one  end  of  it  a  piece  of  thin  indiarubber 
tubing  I,  of  a  rather  larger  diameter,  say  J  inch,  as  shown 
in  the  accompanying  diagram.  The  tube 
of  wood  or  glass  represents  the  windpipe, 
and  the  indiarubber  part  the  larynx.  The 
space  enclosed  by  the  edge  of  the  india- 
rubber  EE,  represents  the  glottis.  If  we 
leave  the  indiarubber  in  its  natural  posi- 
tion and  blow  through  the  tube,  air  passes 
out,  making  a  slight  hissing  sound.  This 
corresponds  to  breath.  If  we  take  hold 
of  two  opposite  points  of  the  edge  of  the 
indiarubber  E,  E,  and  draw  them  apart  Fig.  3. 

so  that  two  edges  of  the  indiarubber  come 
into  contact  along  a  straight  line,  we  have  a  representation 


ORGANS   OF   SPEECH  5 

of  the  glottis  in  the  position  for  voice,  the  two  edges 
which  are  in  contact  representing  the  two  vocal  chords. 
Now,  if  we  blow  down  the  tube,  the  air  in  passing  out 
causes  the  edges  to  vibrate  and  a  kind  of  musical  sound  is 
produced.     This  sound  corresponds  to  voice. 

9.  Every  normal  speech  sound  contains  cither  breath 
or  voice.  Those  which  contain  breath  are  called  breathed, 
and  those  which  contain  voice  arc  called  voiced.  Examples 
of  breathed  sounds  are  p,  f ;  examples  of  voiced  sounds 
are  b,  v,  a:\ 

10.  When  we  speak  in  a  whisper,  voice  is  replaced 
throughout  by  whisper  (§  7),  the  breathed  sounds  remain- 
ing unaltered.  It  will  not  be  necessary  to  deal  further 
with  whisper. 

11.  It  does  not  require  much  practice  to  be  able  to 
recognise  by  the  ear  the  difference  between  breathed  and 
voiced  sounds.  The  following  well-known  tests  may  how- 
ever sometimes  be  found  useful.  If  breathed  and  voiced 
sounds  are  pronounced  while  the  ears  are  stopped,  a  loud 
buzzing  sound  is  heard  in  the  latter  case  but  not  in  the 
former.  Again,  if  the  throat  be  touched  by  the  fingers, 
a  distinct  vibration  is  felt  when  voiced  sounds  are  pro- 
nounced, but  not  otherwise.  Compare  in  these  ways  f 
with  V,  p  with  a:. 

1  Letters  in  tliick  type  are  plionetic  symbols.  In  naming  the  pho- 
netic symbols,  they  should  be  designated  by  their  sounds  and  not  by  the 
ordinary  names  of  the  letters ;  thus  the  symbols  p,  f  are  not  called  pi:, 
cf  but  are  designated  by  the  initial  and  final  sounds  of  these  two  groups 
respectively. 


PHONETICS 


ni.     CLASSIFICATION   OF   SOUNDS 

12.  Every  speech  sound  belongs  to  one  or  other  of 
the  two  main  classes  known  as  Vowels  and  Consonants. 
A  VOWEL  (in  normal  speech^)  is  defined  as  a  voiced  sound 
in  which  the  air  has  a  free  passage  through  the  mouth, 
and  does  not  produce  any  audible  friction.  All  other 
sounds  (in  normal  speech^)  are  called  CONSONANTS. 

13.  The  distinction  between  vowels  and  consonants 
is  not  an  arbitrary  physiological  distinction.  It  is  in 
reality  a  distinction  based  on  acoustic  considerations, 
namely  on  the  relative  sonority  of  the  various  sounds. 
Some  sounds  are  more  sonorous  than  others,  that  is  to 
say  they  carry  better  or  can  be  heard  at  a  greater  dis- 
tance. Thus  the  sound  a  pronounced  in  the  normal 
manner  can  be  heard  at  a  greater  distance  than  the  sound 
p  or  the  sound  f  pronounced  in  the  normal  manner.  It 
so  happens  that  the  sounds  defined  as  vowels  in  §  12  are 
noticeably  more  sonorous  than  any  other  speech  sounds 
(when  pronounced  in  the  normal  manner). 

Consonants 

14.  Some  consonants  are  breathed,  others  are  voiced 
(§  9).  To  every  breathed  consonant  corresponds  a  voiced 
consonant,  i.e.  one  produced  with  the  same  position  of  the 
articulating  organs,  but  with  voice  substituted  for  breath, 
and  vice  versa:   thus  v  corresponds  to  f,  b  to  p.      The 

^  Whispered  speech  is  not  considered  as  normal.  In  whispered 
speech  "  voice  "  is  replaced  throughout  by  "  whisper  "  and  every  sound 
consists  of  audible  friction  and  nothing  else  (except  the  *'  stops "  of 
breathed  plosives,  which  have  no  sound  at  all). 


CLASSIFICATION   OF  SOUNDS  7 

breathed  forms  corresponding  to  several  of  the  English 
voiced  consonants,  e.g.,  m,  1,  do  not  occur  regularly  in 
English.  It  is,  however,  a  good  phonetic  exercise  to 
practise  such  unfamiliar  breathed  sounds  (phonetic  sym- 
bols m,  1).  They  may  be  acquired  by  practising  vfvf..., 
zszs...,  until  the  method  of  passing  from  voice  to  breath 
is  clearly  understood,  and  then  applying  the  same  method 
to  m,  1,  etc.,  thus  obtaining  mmmm...,  1111...,  etc.  The 
voiced  consonant  corresponding  to  h  does  not  occur 
regularly  in  English,  but  it  is  not  a  difficult  sound  to 
pronounce. 

Vowels 

15.  There  are  numerous  positions  of  the  organs  of 
speech,  and  more  especially  of  the  tongue,  in  which,  when 
voice  is  produced,  it  is  accompanied  by  little  or  no  noise. 
Such  positions  are  called  vowel  positions.  In  each  of 
these  positions  a  resonance  chamber  is  formed,  which 
modifies  the  quality  of  tone  produced,  and  gives  rise  to 
a  distinct  vowel.  The  number  of  possible  vowels  which 
can  be  distinguished  by  a  good  ear  is  very  large — some 
hundreds — but  in  any  one  language  the  number  of  distinct 
vowels  in  use  is  comparatively  small.  (See  Table  of 
English  Vowels,  p.  14.) 


CLASSIFICATION   OP  CONSONANTS 

16.  Consonants  may  be  classified  (1)  according  to  the 
organs  which  articulate  them,  (2)  according  to  the  manner 
in  which  the  organs  articulate  them.  If  we  classify  them 
according  to  the  organs  which  articulate  them,  we  dis- 
tinguish five  main  classes  : — 


8  PHONETICS 

(1)  Labial  or  lip  sounds,  which  may  be  subdivided 

into 

Bi-lahial,  viz.  sounds  articulated  by  the  two 
lips.     Examples  p,  m. 

Labio-dental,  viz.  sounds  articulated  by  the 
lower  lip  against  the  upper  teeth.  Ex- 
ample f. 

(2)  Dental,  viz.  sounds  articulated  by  the  tip  or 
blade  of  the  tongue  against  the  upper  teeth  or  gums\ 
Examples  t,  ^. 

(3)  Palatal,  viz.  sounds  articulated  by  the  front  of 
the  tongue  against  the  hard  palate.     Example  j. 

(4)  Velar,  viz.  sounds  articulated  by  the  back  of 
the  tongue  against  the  soft  palate^     Example  k. 

(5)  Glottal,  viz.  sounds  articulated  in  the  glottis. 
Example  h. 

17.  If  we  classify  consonants  according  to  the  manner 
in  which  the  organs  articulate  them,  we  distinguish  five 
main  classes : — 

(1)  Plosive,  formed  by  completely  closing  the  air 
passage  and  suddenly  removing  the  obstacle  (or  one  of 
the  obstacles),  so  that  the  air  escapes  making  an  explosive 
sound.     Examples  p,  d. 

(2)  Nasal,  formed  by  completely  closing  the  mouth 
at  some  point,  the  soft  palate  remaining  lowered  so  that 
the  air  is  free  to  pass  out  through  the  nose.  Example  m. 
(These  are  the  only  sounds  of  StP  in  which  the  soft  palate 
is  lowered.) 

(3)  Lateral,  formed  by  an  obstacle  placed  in  the 

middle  of  the  mouth,  the  air  being  free  to  escape  at  the 

sides  (see  §  60).     Example  1. 

^  These  consonants  are  termed  lingual  by  many  authors. 
'  The  velum  is  another  name  for  the  soft  palate. 


CLASSIFICATION  OF  SOUNDS 


9 


(4)  Rolled,  formed  by  a  rapid  succession  of  taps  of 
some  elastic  organ.     Example  rolled  r. 

(5)  Fricative,  formed  by  a  narrowing  of  the  air 
passage  at  some  point  so  that  the  air  in  escaping  makes 
a  kind  of  hissing  sound.     Examples  f,  z. 

The  nasal,  lateral,  and  rolled  consonants  are  sometimes 
grouped  together  under  the  name  of  liquids. 

18.  It  is  convenient  to  arrange  the  consonants  in  a 
table,  horizontal  rows  containing  sounds  articulated  in  the 
same  manner,  and  vertical  columns  containing  sounds 
articulated  by  the  same  organs  thus: — ■ 


Lai 

Bi- 
labial 

3ial 

Labio- 
dental 

Dental 

Palatal 

Velar 

Glottal 

Plosive 

Pb 

ta 

kg 

? 

Nasal 

m 

n 

T) 

Lateral 

1 

(1) 

Rolled 

r 

Fricative 

w 

fv 

05,  sz 
/3,J 

J 

(w) 

h 

Tliese  consonants  are  examined  in  detail  in  55  29 — 105. 


CLASSIFICATION  OP  VOWELS 


19.  The  characteristic  qualities  of  vowels  depend  on 
the  positions  of  the  tongue  and  lips.  It  is  convenient  to 
classify  them  according  to  the  position  of  the  main  part 
of  the  tongue.     The  position  of  the  tip  has  no  great  effect 


10  PHONETICS 

on  vowel  quality,  except  in  the  cases  noted  in  §  71,  which 
do  not  occur  in  StP.  In  the  following  explanation  the 
tip  of  the  tongue  is  supposed  to  be  touching  the  lower 
teeth,  or  at  any  rate  to  be  close  to  them  (see  fig.  5). 

20.  Some  vowels  (e.g.  those  in  see,  far)  have  clear  and 
well-defined  quality ;  others  (e.g.  that  in  bird)  have  a  more 
obscure  sound.  Vowels  of  obscure  quality  are  chiefly  those 
in  which  the  tongue  is  in  an  intermediate  vowel  position, 
not  raised  markedly  in  the  front  or  at  the  back,  and  not 
too  low  down  in  the  mouth ;  vowels  of  well-defined  quality 
are  chiefly  those  in  which  the  tongue  is  remote  from  such 
an  intermediate  position,  that  is  to  say  those  in  which  the 
tongue  is  markedly  raised  in  the  front  or  at  the  back  or 
is  quite  low  down  in  the  mouth.  If  we  examine  the 
tongue  positions  of  the  most  typical  sounds  of  well-defined 
quality  we  find  that  the  highest  points  of  the  tongue  lie 
roughly  on  the  sides  of  a  triangle  the  angles  of  which  are 
marked  by  the  points  i,  a,  u  in  fig.  5  (the  sounds  of  the 
e  type  falling  between  i  and  a,  and  the  sounds  of  the 
o  type  falling  between  a  and  u).  Vowels  which  have 
the  highest  point  of  the  tongue  approximately  on  the 
left-hand  side  of  this  triangle  are  called  front  vowels', 
those  in  which  the  highest  point  of  the  tongue  is  ap- 
proximately on  the  right-hand  side  of  this  triangle  are 
called  hack  vowels  \  those  in  which  the  highest  point  of 
the  tongue  is  well  within  the  triangle  are  called  mixed 
vowels. 

21.  Vowels  are  thus  classed  as  front,  mixed,  and  back, 
according  to  the  horizontal  position  of  the  highest  point 
of  the  tongue.  They  may  also  be  classified  according  to 
the  vertical  position  of  the  highest  point  of  the  tongue. 
Those  in  which  the  tongue  is  as  high  as  possible  con- 


CLASSIFICATION   OF   SOUNDS 


11 


sistently  with  not  producing  perceptible  friction  are  called 
close  vowels.  Those  in  which  the  tongue  is  as  low  as 
possible  are  called  open  vowels.  We  distinguish  two 
intermediate  positions,  half-close  and  half-open,  in  which 
the  tongue  is  lowered  from  the  close  position  to  about 
one-third,  and  two-thirds,  of  the  total  distance  from  the 
close  position  to  the  open  position.  Examples  of  front, 
mixed  and  back  vowels  are  i  (lip,  lip),  a:  (bird,  ba:d), 
u  (good,  gud),  respectively.  Examples  of  close,  half-close, 
half-open,  and  open  vowels  are  u:  (boot,  buit),  e  (pen,  pen). 


Front 


Close 


Half-close 


Half- open 


Open 


Half-closed 


Open 


Fronr  Back' 

Fig.  4.     The  classification  of  vowels. 


Fig.  5.    Tongue-positions  for  the  vowels  l,  a,  u. 


12  PHONETICS 

6  {pair,  pea),  a  {father,  faiSa),  respectively.  Figs.  4 
and  5  will  help  to  make  clear  the  basis  of  the  classifi- 
cation of  vowels.  (Fig.  4  is  an  elaboration  of  the  "  vowel- 
triangle.") 

22.  Vowel  quality  is  also  largely  dependent  on  the 
position  of  the  lips.  The  lips  may  be  held  in  a  natural 
or  neutral  position,  they  may  be  spread  out  so  as  to  leave 
a  long  narrow  opening  between  them,  or  they  may  be 
drawn  together  so  that  the  opening  between  them  is 
more  or  less  round.  Vowels  produced  with  the  lips  in 
the  latter  position  are  called  rounded  vowels.  Others 
are  called  unrounded.  If  the  spreading  of  the  lips  is 
very  marked,  the  vowels  may  be  termed  sj^read.  Such 
lip-spreading  is,  however,  not  usual  in  English,  and  it  is 
sufficient  to  distinguish  the  English  vowels  simply  as 
rounded  and  unrounded.  An  example  of  a  rounded  vowel 
is  u:;  examples  of  unrounded  vowels  are  i,  a:. 

23.  Another  element  which  is  sometimes  of  import- 
ance in  determining  vowel  quality  is  what  may  be  termed 
the  state  of  the  tongue  and  lips  (more  especially  the  former) 
as  regards  muscular  tension.  Vowels  produced  while  the 
tongue  is  in  a  state  of  considerable  muscular  tension 
are  called  tense  vowels;  example  i:  {leap,  liip).  Those 
produced  while  the  tongue  is  not  in  a  state  of  muscular 
tension  but  is  held  loosely,  are  called  lax  vowels ;  example 
i  {lip,  lip).  The  difference  in  quality  between  a  tense 
vowel  and  the  corresponding  lax  vowel  (i.e.  one  in  which 
the  highest  point  of  the  tongue  is  in  about  the  same 
position  as  in  the  case  of  the  tense  vowel,  but  the  tongue 
is  relaxed)  is  sometimes  very  considerable,  especially  in 
the  case  of  close  vowels,     i  is  the  lax  vowel  corresponding 


CLASSIFICATION   OF   SOUNDS  13 

to  the  tense  i:.     The  u:  in  boot,  bu:t,  and  u  in  foot,  fut, 
are  corresponding  tense  and  lax  vowels  \ 

24.  The  tenseness  or  laxness  of  a  vowel  can  in  some 
cases  be  observed  mechanically  by  placing  the  finger  on 
the  throat  between  the  larynx  and  the  chin.  When 
pronouncing  a  lax  vowel  such  as  i  this  part  feels  loose, 
but  when  pronouncing  a  tense  vowel  as  i:,  it  becomes 
considerably  tenser  and  is  slightly  pushed  forward. 

25.  The  soft  palate  may  affect  vowel  quality.  In  the 
articulation  of  normal  vowels  the  soft  palate  is  raised  so 
that  it  touches  the  back  wall  of  the  pharynx  as  shown  in 
fig.  5  (p.  11).  The  result  is  that  no  air  can  pass  through 
the  nose.  It  is,  however,  possible  to  lower  the  soft  palate 
so  that  it  takes  up  the  position  shown  in  fig.  1  (p.  2)  and 
the  air  can  then  pass  out  through  the  nose  as  well  as 
through  the  mouth.  When  vowels  are  pronounced  with 
the  soft  palate  lowered  in  this  way,  they  are  said  to  be 
nasalised.  Nasalised  vowels  do  not  occur  in  StP,  but 
they  are  heard  in  many  dialects,  notably  L  (see  §§  179  ff.). 
Lateral,  rolled  and  fricative  consonants  may  also  be  nasal- 
ised^, but  such  nasalised  consonants  do  not  occur  in  StP. 

2G.  We  now  give  a  table  of  the  vowels  ordinarily 
used  in  StP.  A  few  others  are  used  in  very  careful 
speaking  (see  §  175),  but  it  is  not  necessary  to  complicate 
the  table  by  inserting  them. 

1  The  terms  tense  and  lax  will  only  be  applied  in  the  case  of  close 
and  half-close  vowels,  and  in  the  case  of  the  sounds  o:,  o.  In  other 
cases  it  is  hardly  necessary  to  make  any  distinction  between  tense  and 
lax  vowels ;  in  fact  there  is  in  regard  to  some  of  the  opener  vowels  con- 
siderable difference  of  opinion  as  to  whether  they  are  tense  or  lax. 

2  When  ay\plosive  consonant  is  nasalised,  it  becomes  a  nasal  con- 
sonant, e.g.  piasalised  b  is  in. 


^rUiAJt^ 


14 


PHONETICS 


Front                   Mixed                      Back 

Close 

i:,l  \                              /    u:,u 

Half-close 

e       \                      /       o 

Half-open 

*  w  ^ 

Open 

SB        ^         o: 
a            a  o 

These  vowels  are  examined  in  detail  in  §§  106 — 178. 


IV.     ENGLISH    SPEECH   SOUNDS   IN    DETAIL 

27.  We  are  now  in  a  position  to  consider  the  English 
speech  sounds  in  detail.  It  will  in  many  cases  be  sufficient 
to  explain  the  formation  of  sounds  by  using  the  terms 
already  defined.  Raising  of  the  soft  palate  (as  in  fig.  5) 
is  to  be  implied  in  the  case  of  all  sounds  except  the  nasal 
consonants,  unless  the  contrary  is  stated. 

28.  Thus  when  we  say  that  k  is  the  breathed 
velar  plosive,  no  further  description  is  necessary.  The 
description  'breathed  velar  plosive*  means  that  it  is  a 
consonant  which  is  articulated  by  raising  the  back  of 
the  tongue  so  as  to  touch  the  soft  palate ;  the  soft  palate 
is  raised  so  that  no  air  can  pass  through  the  nose;  the 
air  is  forced  upwards  from  the  lungs  without  causing 
the  vocal  chords  to  vibrate,  and  the  tongue  is  suddenly 
removed  from  the  soft  palate,  the  result  being  an  explosive 
sound.  Similarly,  voiced  labio-dental  fricative  is  a  sufficient 
description  of  the  sound  v.   It  means  that  v  is  a  consonant 


ENGLISH   SPEECH   SOUNDS   IN    DETAIL  16 

articulated  by  placing  the  lower  lip  against  the  upper 
teeth  so  as  to  leave  only  a  very  narrow  space  for  the  air 
to  escape ;  the  soft  palate  is  raised  so  that  no  air  can  pass 
through  the  nose;  air  is  forced  upwards  from  the  lungs, 
and  the  vocal  chords  are  so  placed  that  the  air  passing 
between  them  causes  them  to  vibrate,  producing  voice; 
the  air  in  passing  between  the  lower  lip  and  upper  teeth 
escapes  continuously,  making  a  fricative  noise.  Again, 
close  front  lax  unrounded  is  a  sufficient  explanation  of 
the  formation  oi  the  vowel  i.  It  means  that  i  is  a  vowel 
in  which  the  front  of  the  tongue  is  raised  in  the  direction 
of  the  hard  palate  as  high  as  possible  consistently  with 
not  producing  perceptible  friction,  and  is  held  loosely ;  the 
soft  palate  is  raised,  and  there  is  no  lip-rounding. 

CONSONANTS 
1.     Plosives 

29.  p.     Breathed  bi-labial  plosive.     Example  pipCt 
paip. 

30.  When  p  is  followed  by  a  vowel  in  a  stressed 
syllable  (as  in  apart,  apait),  a  slight  puff  of  breath,  i.e.  a 
slight  h  (§  102),  is  heard  after  the  explosion  of  the  p  and^ 
before  the  beginning  of  the  vowel  IrTStP^lihis  h  sound 
isTo  slight  that  it  is  not  necessary  to  indicate  it  specially 
in  a  practical  phonetic  transcription.  With  some  speakers, 
however,  this  h  sound  is  very  marked,  sufficiently  so  to 
require  a  separate  symbol  in  the  phonetic  transcription, 
thus  aphait.  Such  a  pronunciation  is  not  recommended. 
See  also  Theory  of  Plosive  Consonants,  §§  224  ff. 

31.  b.    Voiced  bi-labial  plosive.    Example  hnhe,  beib. 


16  PHONETICS 

32.  No  remarks  necessary  here.  See,  however,  Theory 
of  Plosive  Consonants,  §§  224  ff.  As  regards  sebm  for 
sevn  see  §  86. 

33.  t.  Breathed  dental  plosive.  Articulated  in  StP 
by  the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  upper  gums.  Example 
touch,  tAtJ. 

34.  A  slight  h  sound  is  inserted  in  StP  between  t 
and  a  following  vowel  in  stressed  syllables,  as  in  target, 
ta:git,  but  this  is  not  sufficient  to  require  marking  in  an 
ordinary  phonetic  transcription.  The  exaggerated  pro- 
nunciation thaigit  is  not  recommended.  See  also  Theory 
of  Plosive  Consonants,  §§  224  ff. 

35.  In  some  N  dialects  when  t  is  followed  by  r  as  in 
true,  tru:,  it  is  articulated  against  the  upper  teeth  instead 
of  the  upper  gums.  This  produces  a  very  peculiar  effect, 
which  sounds  rather  as  if  a  6  were  inserted  (t9ru:).  In 
many  dialects  t  between  two  vowels  is  replaced  in  certain 
cases  by  a  kind  of  semi-rolled  r  (§  69),  Saturday,  saetadi, 
becoming  saeradi.  In  L  get  out  of  the  way  is  often 
pronounced  girsearatSawai.  In  Sc  and  L,  t  is  often 
replaced  by  the  glottal  plosive  ?  (§  47).  Saturday  in 
Glasgow  dialect  is  pronounced  saPadi,  water,  woPr  (StP 
woita).  In  L  the  expression  /  haven't  got  one  (StP  ai 
hsBvnt  got  war)  becomes  aaiijgoPwan. 

36.  In  StP  the  sound  t  is  very  often  dropped  when 
it  occurs  in  the  middle  of  a  group  of  consonants,  especially 
when  preceded  by  s.  This  is  regular  in  words  like  listen, 
castle,  mustn't  (lisn,  kaisl,  mAsnt).  There  are,  however, 
many  cases  in  which  it  is  dropped  in  conversational 
pronunciation  though  it  might  be  retained  in  very  careful 
speaking.      Examples:    next    Christmas,    nekskrismas ; 


ENGLISH  SPEECH  SOUNDS  IN  DETAIL  17 

postman,  pousman;  most  people,  mouspiipl.  Note  the 
word  often,  eight  different  pronunciations  of  which  may 
be  heard  from  educated  people,  viz.  often,  oftn,  ofan, 
ofn,  oiftan,  oiftn,  oifan,  o:fn.  of  tan  is  the  pronuncia- 
tion generally  recommended  by  teachers,  but  many  people 
consider  this  affected,  oifn  and  o:ftan  are  on  the  whole  / 
the  pronunciations  most  frequently  heard  from  educated  \ 
people.     (See  §  146.) 

37.  Some  speakers  often  drop  t  before  d.  Pronuncia- 
tions like  sidaun,  wodjuiwont  for  sitdaun  {sit  down), 
(h)wot<yu:wont  (what  do  you  want?)  may  not  infre- 
quently be  heard  from  educated  people,  but  they  are  not 
pronunciations  to  be  recommended  for  teaching  purposes. 

t  is  often  inserted  in  fifth,  fif(t)9;  sixth,  siks(t)9  and  / 
always  in  eighth,  eit9.  '- 

38.  d.  Voiced  dental  plosive.  Articulated  in  StP  by 
the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  upper  gums.  Example 
deed,  di:d.  '  ^ 

39.  In  some  N  dialects  it  is  articulated  against  the 
upper  teeth  when  followed  by  r,  as  in  drop,  drop.  This 
gives  rather  the  effect  of  an  inserted  ®  (d?5rop).  See 
also  Theory  of  Plosive  Consonants,  §§  224  ff. 

40.  The  sound  d  is  frequently  dropped  in  conversa- 
tional pronunciation  when  it  occurs  in  the  middle  of  a 
group  of  consonants,  especially  when  preceded  or  followed 
by  a  nasal.  Kindness,  grandmother,  are  very  commonly,  if 
not  usually,  pronounced  kainnis,  graenmA^a.  (These  are 
really  cases  of  Assimilation,  see  §§  182  ff.)  A  very  common 
c  ise  is  the  word  and  when  unstressed.  Bread  and  butter 
is  generally  pronounced  brednbAta  (not  bredsendbAta  !), 
and  two-and-six  is  usually  tuiansiks  in  conversational 
pronunciation. 


18  PHONETICS 

41.  k.     Breathed  velar  plosive.    Example  cake,  keik. 

42.  A  slight  h  sound  is  inserted  in  StP  between  k 
and  a  following  vowel  in  stressed  syllables  (as  in  cupboard, 
kAbad),  but  this  is  not  sufficient  to  require  marking  in 
an  ordinary  phonetic  transcription.  The  exaggerated 
pronunciation  khAbad  is  not  recommended.  See  also 
Theory  of  Plosive  Consonants,  §§  224  ff. 

43.  Note  the  common  mispronunciation  a:st  for  a:skt 
(asked).  It  is  no  doubt  due  to  this  that  the  word  ask 
itself  is  so  frequently  pronounced  a:st  in  L  (a:la:stim  for 
aila:sk(h)im,  I'll  ask  him).  As  regards  nAOlrjk  for  nAOir) 
see  §  59. 

44.  g.     Voiced  velar  plosive.     Example  go,  gou. 

45.  See  Theory  of  Plosive  Consonants,  §§  224  ff. 
Note  the  common  mispronunciation  of  recognise  (StP 
rekagnaiz)  as  rekanaiz.  As  regards  g  after  tj  when 
not  required  in  StP  see  §  59. 

46.  The  old-fashioned  use  of  the  breathed  and  voiced 
palatal  plosives  (phonetic  symbols  c,  j),  instead  of  k,g  before 
a  and  ai  (and  a:  in  the  single  word  girl),  is  rapidly  dying 
out  but  is  still  heard  occasionally  in  the  words  kind,  sky, 
girl  (caind,  scai,  jail;  StP  kaind,  skai,  ga:l)\  These 
palatal  sounds  are  frequently  heard  in  L,  e.g.  count,  csunt 
(StP  kaunt  or  kaunt),  catch,  cet/  (StP  kaet/). 

47.  P.  Glottal  plosive.  Formed  by  closing  the 
glottis  completely  (i.e.  bringing  the  vocal  chords  into 
contact),  and  suddenly  opening  it  (i.e.  separating  the 
vocal  chords). 

48.  This  consonant  in  an  exaggerated  form  is  the 
'  For  the  various  pr^onunciations  of  this  latter  word  see  §  170. 


ENGLISH  SPEECH   SOUNDS   IN   DETAIL  19 

explosive  sound  heard  in  coughing.  A  cough  may  be 
represented  in  phonetic  transcription  if  desired.  A  com- 
mon kind  is  Paha  Pah.  The  sound  P  occurs  in  many 
dialects  but  is  not  common  in  StP.  It  frequently  replaces 
t  in  Sc  and  L  (see  §  35).  In  Sc  it  is  sometimes  simply 
inserted  in  the  middle  of  words,  e  g.  in  Glasgow  dialect 
donH  (StP  dount)  is  pronounced  doiPnt. 

49.  In  StP  the  sound  is  sometimes  heard  at  the 
beginning  of  a  syllable  which  normally  begins  with  a 
vowel,  when  that  vowel  is  very  strongly  stressed,  e.g.  it 
waz  tJi  Pounli  wei  ta  du:  it^  and  even  (h)wenPevar  ai 
gou  Sea,  hi:  z  aut.  Sonie  use  it  also  to  avoid  a  sequence 
of  two  vowels  in  such  expressions  as  the  India  Office, 
indja  Pofis.  This  is  no  doubt  due  to  a  reaction  against 
the  pronunciation  indjarofis  which  is  frequently  heard 
even  from  educated  people  (see  §  74).  Some  speakers 
have  a  tendency  to  insert  the  sound  at  the  beginning  of 
all  words  which  normally  begin  with  a  vowel,  whether 
strongly  stressed  or  not:  examples,  Westminster  Abbey, 
wes(t)minsta  Paebi,  the  ends  of  the  earth,  tJi  Pendz  av  tSi 
Pa:6  (StP  wes(t)minstaraBbi,  fJiendzavt$:a:9) ;  this  pro- 
nunciation is,  however,  not  to  be  recommended.  The  sound 
P  should  in  fact  be  avoided  as  much  as  possible.  It  is 
not  a  pleasant  sound  in  itself,  and  is  never  necessary  for 
the  sense.  The  second  syllable  of  (h)weneva  can  be 
made  quite  prominent  enough  without  inserting  P.  India 
Office  may  very  well  be  pronounced  indjaofis. 

2.     Liquids 

50.  m.    Voiced  bi-labial  nasal.    Example  move,  muiy. 

51.  The  corresponding  breathed  sound  (phonetic 
symbol   m)   only  occurs  in   interjections   such   as   i|ixn, 

2—2 


20  PHONETICS 

mipm  (generally  written  hm,  ahem),  and  occasionally  in 
rapid  conversational  pronunciation,  e.g.  ai  doumi|i  maind, 
for  StP  ai  dount  maind.     See  also  §  185. 

52.  In  words  like  prism,  chasm,  prizm,  kaezm,  the  m 
is  syllabic  (§  199).  Many  speakers  insert  a  vowel  of  some 
kind,  usually  a,  between  the  z  and  m  in  such  words 
(prizam,  etc.);  this  pronunciation  is  not  recommended. 
These  words  are  frequently  regarded  in  poetry  as  consti- 
tuting only  one  syllable.  In  such  cases  the  m  should 
be  -pronounced  as  lightly  as  possible. 

53.  m  sometimes  occurs  in  careless  speech  instead  of 
syllabic  n,  when  preceded  by  p  or  b,  e.g.  open,  StP  oup(a)ii 
becoming  oupm,  cup  and  saucer,  StP  kAp  an(d)  8o:s3 
becoming  kApmsoisa.  Such  forms  should  be  avoided. 
Note  the  following  forms  heard  in  L,  sebm,  ilebm,  ebm, 
aipmi,  gremfAiva,  for  StP  sevn,  ilevn,  hevn,  heipani, 
graBn(d)fa:tJ3. 

54.  n.  Voiced  dental  nasal.  Articulated  by  the  tip 
of  the  tongue  against  the  upper  gums.   Example  now,  nau. 

65.  The  corresponding  breathed  sound  (phonetic 
symbol  9)  only  occurs  in  interjectional  sounds  such  as 
9119  and  occasionally  in  rapid  conversational  pronunciation, 
e.g.  ai  doun^  nou  for  ai  dount  nou  (an  expression  which 
is  often  still  further  modified,  becoming  aidou(n)nou, 
or  even  aid(a)nou  in  careless  speaking,  especially  when 
followed  by  a  strongly  stressed  word  such  as  how,  hau). 
See  also  §  185. 

56.  n  is  frequently  syllabic  (§  199),  especially  in  syl- 
lables beginning  with  other  dental  consonants,  thus,  mutton, 
ridden,  person,  are  usually  pronounced  mAtn,  ridn,  paisn 
(not  mAtan,  etc.).     Sometimes  this  syllabic  n  does  not 


ENGLISH   SPEECH  SOUNDS   IN   DETAIL  21 

count  as  a  separate  syllable  in  poetry,  words  like  even 
being  considered  as  monosyllabic  and  written  ev'n^,  etc. 
In  such  cases  the  n  must  be  pronounced  as  lightly  as 
possible. 

57.  In  uneducated  speech  n  is  sometimes  omitted 
from  the  beginning  of  words  which  ought  to  begin  with 
it.  The  commonest  case  is  the  pronunciation  of  nought, 
no:t  (zero)  as  o:t.  This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  word 
is  usually  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article  a,  an  (a,  an), 
and  the  group  a  no:t  is  almost  indistinguishable  from 
an  o:t.  Conversely  in  some  dialects  an  initial  n  is  some- 
times inserted  where  not  required,  e.g.  nATjkl  for  ATjkl 
(due  to  main  AT)kl)^ 

58.  T).  Voiced  velar  nasal.  Examples  song,  sotj,  ink, 
iTjk. 

59.  Many  speakers  use  syllabic  i)  instead  of  (a)n 
when  preceded  by  k  or  g,  e.g.  bacon,  beikij,  better  beik(a)n. 
The  mispronunciation  of  "  dropping  one's  ^'s  "  is  simply  a 
substitution  of  n  for  tj,  e.g.  kAmin  for  kAmiij  (coming). 
In  L  k  is  often  inserted  after  t)  in  nothing,  anything, 
the  words  being  pronounced  nafiTjk,  enifii]k  (StP  nAGii], 
eniGiTj).  In  some  dialects,  especially  in  N.Mid.,  g  is  added 
after  T)  Avhere  it  is  not  inserted  in  StP,  e.g.  Iotjcj  for  Iot) 
(long),  sii]giT)g  for  sItj'tj  (singing)^  Note  the  uneducated 
pronunciation  kit/ii]  for  kit/in  (kitchen), 

^  Distinct  from  the  other  contraction  e^en. 

'  The  same  thing  has  occurred  in  the  past  in  many  words  which  are 
now  included  in  standard  English.  Adder  was  formerly  nadder,  newt 
was  formerly  ewt. 

3  In  StP  ng  is  pronounced  tj  alone  (1)  when  final,  (2)  when  medial  in 
words  formed  from  words  ending  in  ng,  by  the  addition  of  a  simple  sufBx 
such  as  -er,  -ing  (e.g.  siTja,  siijii],  compared  with  anger,  seijga,  changing. 
tjeindjiij). 


22  PHONETICS 

60.  1.  Voiced  dental  lateral.  Articulated  by  the 
tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  upper  gums.  The  sound 
is  sometimes  pronounced  uni-laterally,  i.e.  the  tongue 
obstructs  the  air-passage  in  the  middle  of  the  mouth  and 
on  one  side,  the  air  being  free  to  pass  out  on  the  other. 
The  sound  so  produced  is  not  appreciably  different  from 
the  normal  lateral  sound.     Example  laugh,  laif 

61.  Many  varieties  of  1  sounds  may  be  formed  with 
the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  upper  gums  in  the 
lateral  position.  These  varieties  depend  on  the  position 
of  the  main  part  of  the  tongue.  While  the  tip  is  touching 
the  upper  gums,  the  main  part  is  free  to  take  up  any 
position,  and  in  particular,  it  may  take  up  any  given 
vowel  position.  The  1  sound  produced  with  a  given  vowel 
position  of  the  main  part  of  the  tongue,  always  has  a 
noticeable  resemblance  to  the  vowel  in  question.  Thus 
the  1  sound  heard  in  StP  people  very  much  resembles 
the  vowel  u,  the  reason  being  that  though  the  sound  is 
primarily  articulated  by  the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the 
upper  gums,  yet  the  back  of  the  tongue  is  simultaneously 
raised  in  the  direction  of  the  soft  palate  into  the  u 
position  (§  162).  An  1  sound  in  which  the  front  of  the 
tongue  is  raised  to  the  i  position  (§  110)  sounds  rather 
like  the  vowel  i,  and  one  in  which  the  main  part  of  the 
tongue  is  neutral  sounds  rather  like  the  vowel  9.  These 
varieties  of  1  may  be  represented  by  1",  1*,  1*,  ...^ 

^  It  is  often  stated  (erroneously)  that  the  peculiar  qualities  of  the 
sounds  here  denoted  by  1",  l=»,  as  compared  with  1*,  1»,  are  due  to 
retraction  of  the  tip  of  the  tongue.  As  a  matter  of  fact  I"  pronounced 
with  the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  back  part  of  the  gums  is  practically 
indistinguishable  from  I"  pronounced  with  the  tip  of  the  tongue  against 
the  teeth,  and  the  same  applies  to  all  the  other  varieties. 


ENGLISH   SPEECH  SOUNDS    IN   DETAIL  2:3 

62.  In  StP  when  the  1  sound  is  final  or  followed  by 
a  consonant,  it  usually  has  the  value  1";  when  followed 
by  a  vowel  it  has  the  value  1®  which  tends  towards  I*  when 
the  following  vowel  is  i:  or  i  (compare /eeZ,  fill",  with /ee?- 
17?^,  fi:l*ii],  and  the  two  Vs  in  little,  l4tl").  Some  speakers 
use  1®  in  all  cases,  and  this  pronunciation  is  usually  recom- 
mended by  elocutionists.  Pronunciations  like  pi:pl®  are 
however  very  often  found  difficult  to  acquire  by  those  who 
are  accustomed  to  pronounce  piipl". 

63.  In  L  the  1  sound  when  final  or  followed  by  a 
consonant,  has  the  value  1',  e.g.  field,  fil'd  (StP  fi:l"d 
or  fi:l®d).  It  is  sometimes  even  replaced  by  a  vowel 
resembling  o,  e.g.  raiowai  for  reilwei  (railway).  In 
the  N  and  in  Ireland  the  1  sound  when  final  or  followed 
by  a  consonant  is  often  pronounced  1*  (piipl',  bells,  bel*z). 

64.  Pronunciations  such  as  f  il'd  may  be  corrected  by 
putting  the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  upper  gums  in 
the  lateral  position,  and  trying  to  pronounce  simultaneously 
different  vowels  (a,  e,  o,  u:,  i:...)  one  after  the  other; 
with  a  little  practice  students  will  be  able  to  produce 
readily  the  various  varieties  of  1  (P,  1®,  1*,  ...),  and  will 
therefore  be  able  in  particular  to  pronounce  the  1",  1*  of 
StP. 

65.  In  transcribing  StP  the  plain  symbol  1  is  used  to 
avoid  unnecessary  complication,  its  precise  value  depend- 
ing on  the  rule  given  at  the  beginning  of  §  62, 

66.  The  following  diagrams  showing  the  approximate 
tongue-positions  of  1*,  1"  will  help  to  make  clear  the 
formation  of  the  1  sounds.  They  should  be  compared 
with  the  tongue-positions  of  i,  u  shown  in  fig.  5  (p.  11). 


21 


PHONETIC 


V  lu 

(i)  Fig.  6.  (ii) 

67.  1  is  sometimes  dropped  in  careless  speech,  e.g. 
wS8/(a)wigou  for  (h)wea/alwi:gou  {where  shall  we  go  ?), 
o:rait  for  ailrait  (all  right).  Breathed  1  sounds  do  not 
exist  regularly  in  English ;  see,  however,  §  185. 

68.  r.  Voiced  dental  rolled.  Formed  by  a  rapid 
succession  of  taps  made  by  the  tip  of  the  tongue  against 
the  upper  gums.     Examples  right,  write,  rait. 

69.  The  fully  rolled  sound  is  common  in  N.Eng.  It 
is  not  generally  used  in  StP,  though  it  is  regarded  by 
most  teachers  as  the  correct  pronunciation  of  the  letter  r 
when  followed  by  a  vowel.  In  StP  a  semi-rolled  r,  i.e.  one 
which  is  formed  like  the  fully-rolled  sound,  but  consists 
of  one  single  tap  of  the  tongue \  is  commonly  used  between 

^  This  sound  may  be  represented  by  £  when  great  accuracy  is  required, 
but  a  separate  symbol  is  not  usually  necessary. 


ENGLISH  SPEECH   SOUNDS   IN   DETAIL  25 

two  vowels,  as  in  period,  piariad,  arrive,  araiv*.  It  is 
also  frequently  used  after  G,  t  (§§  87,  89),  as  in  three, 
Gri:.  In  other  cases,  and  notably  when  preceded  by  a 
dental  consonant,  the  r  sound  is  a  voiced  dental  fricative 
consonant,  which  may  be  represented  when  necessary  by 
J  (§  95).  Examples :  try,  taai,  draw,  djo:,  Henry,  henji, 
shrink,  /aii)k  (usually  written  trai,  etc.  for  convenience). 

70.  Many  S.Eng.  speakers  use  J  (§  95)  in  all  cases. 
These  are  said  not  to  "roll  their  r's."  There  are  no 
infallible  rules  for  learning  to  pronounce  the  rolled  r. 
The  method  usually  recommended  is  the  following. 
Pronounce  tadaitada:...  at  first  slowly  and  then  with 
gradually  increasing  speed.  If  the  tongue  is  kept  loose, 
when  this  is  pronounced  very  fast,  the  d  tends  to  become 
a  kind  of  semi-rolled  r  (traitra: ...).  When  the  semi- 
rolled  r  has  been  thus  acquired,  after  a  little  practice  the 
action  can  be  extended  to  the  fully-rolled  sound.  The 
only  other  method  is  to  practise  all  kinds  of  voiced  dental 
fricative  sounds,  using  considerable  force  of  the  breath 
and  keeping  the  tongue  loose.  After  a  little  practice 
students  usually  manage  to  hit  on  the  position  in  which 
the  tip  of  the  tongue  will  begin  to  vibrate  slightly.  A 
perfect  sustained  r  often  requires  very  considerable  prac- 
tice, say  five  or  ten  minutes  a  day  for  several  weeks. 

71.  When  final  or  followed  by  a  consonant,  the  letter 
r  is  not  pronounced  as  a  consonant  at  all  in  StP,  e.g. 
farm,  fa:m;  purse,  pais;  nor,  no:  {=^gnnw)',  poor,  pua; 
jjair,  pea;  fire,  faia".  In  Sc  a  consonantal  r  sound  (i.e. 
r  fully  or  semi-rolled,  or  j)  is  used  in  this  position,  thus 

'  Exception,  where  the  first  vowel  is  o  and  is  preceded  by  a  dental 
consonant.  In  these  cases  x  (§  95)  is  used,  e.g.  history,  bistazi,  literary, 
Utoaooi. 

'  When  a  word  ending  with  r  is  followed  by  a  word  beginning  with  a 


26 


PHONETICS 


farm,  pArs,  puir^  In  N  the  letter  r  is  either  pronounced 
J  in  this  position,  or  is  heard  as  a  peculiar  modification 
of  the  preceding  vowel.  This  modification  is  called  inversion 
and  is  produced  by  turning  back  the  tip  of  the  tongue 
towards  the  hard  palate  during  the  pronunciation  of  the 
vowel  (phonetic  symbol    placed  under  the  symbol  for  the 


Fig.  7.    Diagram  illnstrating  Inversion, 
sound  which  is  thus  modified,  thus  CL,  inverted  a).    Fig.  7 
shows  the  approximate  tongue-position  in  pronouncing  an 
open  vowel  such  as  a  with  inversion  of  the  tongue. 

72.  This  modification  of  vowels  is  found  not  only  in 
N  but  also  in  W  (where  it  is  very  marked)  and  many 
other  parts,  including  L.     Examples:  heard,  ha:d,  there, 

vowel  which  is  closely  connected  with  the  first  word  by  the  sense,  a 
consonantal  r  is  generally  inserted,  e.g.  •  peor  ev  btuts.  The  omission 
of  this  r  (pe©  ov)  though  common,  is  not  to  be  recommended. 

^  Some  Southern  English  elocutionists  recommend  inserting  a  trace 
of  a  consonantal  r  sound  finally  and  before  consonants,  as  is  usually 
done  in  singing ;  there  does  not  however  seem  to  be  any  great  advantage 
in  doing  so. 


I 


ENGLISH   SPEECH  SOUNDS   IN   DETAIL  27 

«E8,  or  «6:i,  farw.,  fa:m,  for  StP  haid,  «ea,  fa:m.  This 
inversion  can  be  corrected  by  keeping  the  tip  of  the  tongue 
1  irmly  pressed  against  the  lower  teeth  during  the  pro- 
nunciation of  the,  vowel,  holding  it  down  mechanically 
if  necessary,  say  with  the  end  of  a  pencil. 

73.  In  parts  of  Scotland,  Northumberland  and  Dur- 
ham r  is  replaced  by  a  uvular  rolled  consonant,  known  as 
the  "burr,"  formed  by  a  vibration  of  the  uvula  against 
the  back  of  the.  tongue  (phonetic  symbol  b). 

74.  Many  speakers,  including  educated  speakers, 
insert  a  consonantal  r  sound  in  such  phrases  as  the  idea 
of  it,  the  India  Office,  where  there  is  no  r  in  the  spelling, 
so  as  to  avoid  the  succession  of  vowels  aa,  ao,  etc.,  thus : 
tSi  aidiar  av  it,  indjar  of  is,  hi:  put  iz  Ambrelar  Ap, 
a  soudar  an  milk  and  a  vanilar  ais,  instead  of  aidia  av, 
etc.  This  is  considered  incorrect  by  most  teachers.  In 
L  it  is  done  not  only  after  a  as  in  the  above  examples 
but  also  after  stressed  vowels,  e.g.  tJa  loir  av  ii]C|land  {law 
of),  BOirin  (sawing),  and  also  where  in  StP  there  is  an 
unstressed  ou,  e.g.  swolarin  (swallowing,  StP  swolouirj). 

75.  Note  the  incorrect  insertion  of  a  before  the  r 
sound  in  Henry,  umbrella,  L  enari,  Ambarela,  StP  henri, 
Ambrela. 

76.  When  there  are  two  consecutive  weak  syllables 
beginning  with  the  r  sound  in  StP,  one  of  the  rs  is  dropped 
in  L,  e.g.  lAib(a)ri,  febjuari  or  febjueri  for  StP  laibrari, 
(library),  februari  (February).  Servants  who  go  out  by 
the  week  generally  call  themselves  tempariz  (temporaries, 
StP  temparariz). 

77.  A  common  fault  is  the  substitution  of  a  semi- 
vocalic  V  for  r  (for  the  meaning  of  "semi- vocalic"  see  §  105). 

*  f :  denotes  a  lengthened  e . 


28  priONETics 

This  peculiarity  is  usually  represented  in  print  by  w  {vewy 
for  very,  etc.).  The  sound  is,  however,  not  w  but  a  very 
weak  kind  of  v,  which  may  be  represented  by  v^  (vev^i 
for  StP  veri). 

78.  Breathed  r  sounds  do  not  exist  regularly  in 
English;  see,  however,  §  185. 

79.  In  transcribing  StP  we  shall  in  future  use  the 
symbol  r  in  all  cases  so  as  to  avoid  unnecessary  complica- 
tions. Whether  r,  r  or  j  is  actually  pronounced  depends 
on  circumstances,  as  mentioned  in  §  69. 

3,     Fricatives 

80.  w.  Voiced  bi-labial  fricative.  The  back  of  the 
tongue  is  simultaneously  raised  in  the  direction  of  the 
soft  palate.  The  consonant  is  therefore  very  like  the 
vowel  u  (§  162).  Some  phoneticians  prefer  to  regard  it 
as  a  consonantal  u,  and  represent  it  by  fi.  Example 
want,  wont. 

81.  The  corresponding  breathed  consonant  (phonetic 
symbol  ia)  is  used  by  many  speakers  in  words  spelt  with 
wh  (what,  lAot).  This  is  regular  in  Sc  and  N.Eng.,  but 
w  is  the  more  usual  in  S.  Eng.  (wot).  Some  use  hw 
instead  of  this  ja.  The  pronunciation  m  or  hw  is 
generally  recommended  by  teachers  as  correct  in  words 
beginning  with  wh.  These  words  may  be  conveniently 
transcribed  with  (h)w,  this  being  taken  to  mean  that 
either  w,  m  or  hw  may  be  used.  For  other  cases  in 
which  JA  is  occasionally  heard  see  §  185. 

82.  Note  that  w  is  often  omitted  in  the  words  will, 
would,  e.g.  that  will  do,  9aetldu:. 

83.  f.  Breathed  labio-dental  fricative.  Example 
foot,  fut. 


ENGLISH   SPEECH   SOUNDS   IN   DETAIL  29 

84.  Note  the  faulty  pronunciations  of  dtphihoiig, 
naphtha,  etc.  as  dip9oTj,  naepBa,  etc.  (StP  difOoTj,  naefGa, 
etc.).  Note  also  the  dialectal  pronunciation  of  nephew 
(StP  nevju:)  as  nefju:. 

85.  V.  Voiced  labio-dental  fricative.  Examples  vain, 
vein,  vein. 

86.  In  L  and  other  dialects,  v  has  become  b  in  words 
ending  in  v(a)n  in  StP,  e.g.  sebm,  ilebm,  ebm,  for  StP 
sevn,  ilevn,  hevn.  In  L  the  v  of  unstressed  of  and  have 
(av)  is  regularly  dropped  before  consonants  (e.g.  eio:t9a- 
danit,  StP  hi:o:ttuavdAnit,  he  ought  to  have  done  it). 
This  may  sometimes  be  heard  even  from  educated  speakers, 
e.g.  an  auta^awei  pleis,  instead  of  autavtSawei. 

87.  G.  A  breathed  dental  fricative.  Articulated  by 
the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  upper  teeth,  the  main 
part  of  the  tongue  being  more  or  less  flat  (see  fig.  8). 
Example  thin,  Gin. 

88.  In  careless  speaking  G  is  sometimes  weakened 
to  a  kind  of  h  between  two  vowels,  e.g.  nohaerjkju  for 
nouGaBTjkju:.  There  is  also  a  tendency  to  drop  G  or  change 
it  into  t  in  combinations  such  as  nGs,  sGs,  e.g.  sikss  for 
siks(t)Gs  (sixths),  mAns  or  mAnts  for  mAnGs  (months). 
Such  contractions  should  be  avoided  ^  In  L  the  sound  G 
is  frequently  replaced  by  f,  e.g.  frei,  nafirjk  for  Gri:, 

HAGiT). 

89.  9.  A  voiced  dental  fricative.  It  is  the  voiced 
form  of  G  (see  fig.  8).     Example  then,  Sen. 

90.  In  L  this  sound  is  frequently  replaced  by  v,  e.g. 
fAiva  for  fa:Sa.  Note  the  old-fashioned  pronunciation  of 
kloutSz  as  klouz,  which  is  now  considered  a  vulgarism. 

*  In  asthma,  seaSma,  the  9  is  generally  very  weak,  but  should  not  be 
omitted  entirely,     sestms  is  also  permissible. 


30  PHONETICS 

91.  s.  A  breathed  dental  fricative.  Articulated  by 
the  tip  of  the  tongue^  against  the  upper  gums,  the  front 
part  of  the  tongue  being  slightly  raised  towards  the  hard 
palate  (see  fig.  8).  Example  cease,  si:s.  As  regards  sj 
becoming  /  see  §  100. 

92.  z.  A  voiced  dental  fricative.  It  is  the  voiced 
form  of  s  (see  fig.  8).  Examples  zeal,  zi:l,  has,  haez.  As 
regards  zj  becoming  5  see  §  100. 

93.  /.  A  breathed  dental  fricative.  Articulated  by 
the  tip  of  the  tongue^  against  the  upper  gums,  the  front 
of  the  tongue  being  considerably  raised  towards  the  hard 
palate  (see  fig.  8).  Many  speakers  add  some  lip-rounding 
to  this  consonant.  Examples  shoe,  /u:,  church,  t/a:t/.  As 
regards  tj  becoming  t/  see  §  101. 

94.  3.  A  voiced  dental  fricative.  It  is  the  voiced 
form  of  /  (see  fig.  8).  Many  speakers  use  lip-rounding. 
Examples  measure,  mesa,  judge,  d5Ad5.  As  regards  dj 
becoming  d5  see  §  101. 

95.  J.  A  voiced  dental  fricative.  Articulated  by 
the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  upper  gums,  the  front 
part  of  the  tongue  being  rather  hollowed  (see  fig.  8). 

96.  It  is  the  r  sound  regularly  used  in  StP  when  the 
preceding  sound  is  a  dental  consonant,  e.g.  draw,  djo:, 
Henry,  henji  (usually  written  dro:,  henri  to  avoid  un- 
necessary complication).  It  is  also  very  commonly  used 
initially,  and  when  preceded  by  consonants  other  than 
dentals.  When  intervocalic  the  r  sound  is  usually  semi- 
rolled.  There  are,  however,  many  who  use  j  in  all  cases 
(see  §  69).   Jn  some  dialects  J  is  replaced  by  the  'inverted' 

1  Some  articulate  the  sound  with  the  blade,  keeping  the  tip  against 
the  lower  teeth.  The  sound  thus  produced  is  not  appreciably  different 
from  the  normal  sound. 


ENGLISH  SPEECH  SOUNDS   IN   DETAIL 


31 


consonant  J,  i.e.  a  fricative  r  sound  pronounced  with  the 
tip  of  the  tongue  turned  back  towards  the  hard  palate. 
As  regards  partial  de vocalisation  of  J  see  §  185. 

97.    The  formation  of  the  various  dental  fricatives  will 
be  made  clearer  by  the  following  diagram. 


e,  s 

s,  z 


Fig.  8. 
Tongue-positions  of  the  dental  fricatives'*. 

98.  J.  Voiced  palatal  fricative.  Example  young,  jatj 
The  tongue-position  is  very  similar  to  that  which  produces 
the  vowel  i  (§  110),  but  the  tongue  is  slightly  higher  (see 
fig.  9,  p.  51).  Some  phoneticians  prefer  to  regard  the 
sound  as  a  consonantal  i,  and  represent  it  by  1 

99.  The   corresponding    breathed    sound   (phonetic 

symbol  9)  is  occasionally  heard  instead  of  initial  hj,  e.g. 

9u:d5  for  hjuids  (huge)  (see  also  §  185).     Note  the  dia- 

^  For  the  sake  of  clearness  the  mouth  has  been  drawn  wide  open.  As 
a  matter  of  fact,  in  pronouncing  u,  z  and  J,  j  the  teeth  are  generally 
almost  in  contact. 


32  PHONETICS 

lectal  pronunciation  of  ear  (StP  ia)  as  jia  or  Jai.    J  is 
often  omitted  in  beyond,  bi(j)ond. 

100.  In  L  and  other  dialects,  StP  sj,  zj  often  become 
J,  3,  e.g.  i/u:,  tJiJia,  isaboksredel,  for  isju:  (issue), 
tSisjia  {this  year),  izjoiboksredi  (Is  your  box  ready?). 
This  change  is  due  to  assimilation  (§  191).  Former  sj,  zJ 
have  become  /,  3  in  StP  in  many  cases,  e.g.  nation,  nei/(a)n 
(Shakespearian  pronunciation  nsisjon  or  naeision^),  but 
in  the  best  pronunciation  this  assimilation  has  not  been 
made,  except  where  the  following  sound  is  a  or  a  syllabic 
consonant^,  as  in  nei/(a)n,  ocean,  ouJ(a)n,  special,  spej(a)l. 
Exceptional  cases :  sure,  Jua,  sugar,  /uga,  usual,  Ju:3ual 
(sometimes  contracted  in  rapid  familiar  speech  to  Ju:3ul, 
ju:3(a)l).  In  casual  the  pronunciations  kaezjual,  ks3ual, 
kae5Jual  may  all  be  heard  from  educated  people. 

101.  In  L  and  other  dialects,  StP  tj,  dj  often  become 
t/,  d3,  by  assimilation  (§  192),  e.g.  tjiiib  (for  iii  see 
§  158)  for  tjuib,  indsius  for  in<yu:s.  Former  tj,  6j 
have  become  tj,  d3  in  StP  in  many  cases,  e.g.  nature, 
neit/a,  grandeur,  grsendsa  (Shakespearian  naeitjur^, 
grandjur).  In  the  best  pronunciation  tj,  d3  are  not 
used  in  such  words  unless  the  following  sound  is  a  or  a 
syllabic  consonant.  In  very  careful  speaking  a  compromise 
is  often  made  between  tj,  dj  and  tj,  d3,  in  words  of  this 
kind.  This  compromise  may  be  represented  when  necessary 
by  tj^,  d3^.  In  recitation  nature  would  be  pronounced 
neitj^a  rather  than  neitja,  grandeur,  graends^ua  or 
even  graencyua  rather  than  grsnd5a. 

*  ae:  denotes  a  lengthened  ee. 

2  The  assimilation  is  not  invariably  made  even  in  these  cases,  excep- 
tions being  words  which  are  comparatively  rare,  especially  names  of 
places  etc.,   e.g.   Lycia,  lisjo,  not  lijo,   Elysian,  ilizjan,  cp.  elision, 


ENGLISH  SPEECH  SOUNDS  IN   DETAIL  33 

102.  h.  Breathed  glottal  fricative.  Examples  hard, 
ha:d,  who,  hu:,  hit,  hit.  This  is  the  fricative  sound  heard 
as  the  air  passes  through  the  open  glottis,  the  other  organs 
being  in  position,  for  the  following  vowels 

103.  The  sound  h  disappeared  long  ago  from  L  and 
many  other  dialects.  Dropping  ^'s  has  long  been  looked 
upon  as  a  vulgarism.  The  influence  of  teachers  is  now- 
beginning  to  cause  the  sound  to  reappear  in  the  pronun- 
ciation of  the  uneducated  classes.  The  chief  difficulty 
experienced  is  that  when  those  who  do  not  naturally 
possess  the  sound  try  to  acquire  it,  they  often  insert  it 
where  not  required  (e.g.  aemanhegz  for  hsemandegz). 

104.  In  StP  h  is  frequently  dropped  in  unimportant 
words  such  as  him,  her,  have,  when  unstressed,  e.g.  /  should 
have  thought  so,  ai  /ad  av  9o:t  sou,  but  in  deliberate 
speaking  (recitation,  etc.)  it  should  be  inserted. 

SEMI-VOWELS 

105.  All  fricative  consonants  may  be  pronounced 
with  a  varying  amount  of  friction.  In  the  case  of  voiced 
consonants,  when  the  friction  is  very  slight,  the  sounds 
become  what  are  called  semi-vowels,  sounds  which  are  on 
the  border  line  between  vowels  and  consonants  (see 
definition  of  vowels  and  consonants,  §  13).  Fricative 
consonants  in  which  the  friction  is  strong  may  be  termed 
pure  fricatives.  To  every  pure  fricative  corresponds  a 
semi- vowel  and  vice  versa.  Of  the  English  fricative  con- 
sonants w,  J,  and  j  are  pronounced  with  much  less  friction 
than  the  rest  and  may  be  classed,  if  desired,  as  semi- 
vowels. 

^  It  would  therefore  be  logically  more  accurate  to  represent  the  li  in 
hard,  lia:d  by  ^,  the  li  in  hit,  hit  by  |,  etc.  (q  being  the  symbol  of 
devocalisation),  bat  this  would  be  practically  inconvenient. 

J.  3 


34  PHONETICS 


VOWELS 


(For  the  meaning  of  the  terms  closed,  front,  etc.,  see 
§§  20-23.) 

106.  i:.  Close  front  tense  unrounded.  Example 
meet,  mi:t. 

107.  Many  speakers  slightly  diphthongise  the  sound, 
especially  when  final  (for  the  meaning  of  the  term  diphthong 
see  §  201).  This  diphthong  may  be  represented  by  i;j  or 
ij,  e.g.  sea,  si:  or  siy  (sy).   Pure  i:  is,  however,  preferable. 

108.  In  L  the  vowel  is  regularly  diphthongised,  and 
the  diphthongisation  is  much  more  marked  than  in  St  P. 
One  form  is  a  diphthong  beginning  with  a  very  lax  I, 
and  finishing  with  a  tenser  i  or  j.  Another  form  is  el, 
e.g.  akapatei  for  StP  akApavti:.  When  followed  by  1 
(L  1*,  §  63)  the  vowel  is  reduced  bo  simple  i  or  e,  e.g. 
field,  f il'd  or  felM,  for  StP  fi:l»d  or  fi:lM  (§  62). 

109.  Some  use  i:  as  the  first  element  of  the  diphthong 
in  hear,  thus  hi:a.     i  is  however  preferable  (hia). 

110.  i.     Close  front  lax  unrounded.    Example  ^^,  fit. 

111.  In  StP  the  sound  tends  towards  e  when  un- 
stressed (§  205),  e.g.  the  second  vowel  in  very,  veri,  is  not 
very  different  from  the  first.  The  two  vowels  in  pity,  pitl, 
are  noticeably  different.  When  great  accuracy  is  required 
this  lowered  i  may  be  represented  by  i  (ven).  This 
sound  I  is  also  heard  in  words  like  basket,  baiskit, 
language,  laBT]gwid5  (usually  written  for  convenience 
ba:skit,  IseTjgwids). 

112.  In  carefiil  speech  a  distinction  is  often  made 
between  these  words  spelt  with  e,  a,  etc.,  and  words  spelt 
with  i,  2/,  etc.,  i  being  used  in  the  first,  and  i  in  the 


ENGLISH  SPEECH  SOUNDS  IN  DETAIL  35 

socond.  Thus  many  good  speakers  would  make  a  distinc- 
tion between  prophet,  profit,  profit,  profit;  enquire, 
inkwaia,  inquire,  inkwaia;  language,  \?Bi^'yNi6.'^,  Gam- 
bridge,  keimbrid^. 

113.  In  L  i  sometimes  tends  to  become  e  even  when 
.stressed,  and  when  final  it  is  diphthongised,  e.g.  sing, 
StP  sIt),  in  L  frequently  seij;  twenty,  L  twentei,  StP 
twenti.  In  some  dialects,  e.g.  Australian  English,  i  is 
replaced  by  the  corresponding  tense  vowel  when  final  (as 
in  very,  veri).  Note  the  artificial  pronunciation  of  Eng- 
land as  CTjgland  (StP  irjgland). 

114.  i  also  occurs  in  StP  as  the  first  element  of  the 
diphthong  ia  (for  the  definition  of  the  term  diphthong  see 
§  201).  Examples :  here,  hear,  hia.  This  diphthong  is 
often  pronounced  i:a  (in  N  and  W  etc.,  i:a,  iu,  etc.,  §§71, 
72),  but  ia  is  preferable.  In  affected  pronunciation  the 
diphthong  often  becomes  Ia  or  ia  (for  a,  a  see  §§  147, 
129),  oh  dear  being  pronounced  oiidia,  StP  being  oudia 
(for  oii  see  §  153).  Note  the  frequent  omission  of  i  in 
year,  jia  or  jai.  i  also  occurs  in  the  diphthongs  ei,  ai,  oi 
(see  g  117,  123,145). 

115.  e.  Half-close  front  lax  unrounded.  Examples: 
jjen,  pen,  head,  bed. 

116.  In  L  this  vowel  is  often  replaced  by  i,  e.g.  git, 
ind5in  for  get  (get),  end5in  (engine).  In  many  dialects 
it  is  replaced  by  the  opener  e  (§  118),  thus,  pen,  bed. 

117.  Besides  occurring  independently,  the  sound  e 
occurs  in  StP  as  the  first  element  of  the  diphthong  ei, 
e.g.  day,  dei.  With  many  speakers,  especially  in  N.Eng. 
this  diphthong  is  tense,  i.e.  the  two  elements  are  the  tense 

3—2 


36  PHONETICS 

vowels  corresponding  to  the  lax  e,  i.  In  Sc  the  diphthong 
is  not  generally  used,  a  pure  tense  vowel  (phonetic  symbol 
e:)  being  substituted  (de:).  In  L  the  first  element  of  the 
diphthong  ei  is  much  opener  than  in  StP,  becoming  e,  ae, 
a,  or  even  a  (§§  118,  121,  123,  129),  thus  dei,  daBi,  dai, 
dai.  In  L  e  sometimes  occurs  instead  of  a  (see  §  148). 
Note  the  faulty  pronunciation  of  aerate  (StP  eiareit  or 
eareit)  as  eareit  or  iareit.  The  words  again,  always 
are  often  pronounced  agen,  oilwiz,  o:lwaz,  but  the  forms 
agein,  oilweiz  are  preferable. 

118.  e.  Half-open  front  unrounded.  This  sound  only 
occurs  in  StP  in  the  diphthong  ea.  Examples  there,  their, 
tJea.     See  also  the  previous  section. 

119.  In  the  pronunciation  of  many  S.Eng.  speakers, 
the  first  element  of  this  diphthong  is  more  open  than  e, 
being  in  fact  practically  ae  (§  121)  ("SaBa).  The  form  ea  is 
preferable.  In  L  the  first  element  of  this  diphthong  is 
the  half-close  tense  vowel  e:  (tJeia). 

120.  In  many  dialects,  especially  N  and  W,  the 
diphthong  becomes  ea,  e:,  ej,  etc.  (§§  71,  72). 

121.  ae.  A  vowel  intermediate  between  half-open 
front  unrounded,  and  open  front  unrounded ^  Example 
man,  maen. 

122.  In  N  the  sound  tends  towards  the  fully  open 
vowel  a  (§  123)  (man).  In  L  the  sound  generally  tends 
towards  6  or  e,  e.g.  keb  or  keb  for  kaeb  (cab). 

123.  a.  Open  front  unrounded.  This  vowel  only 
occurs  in  StP  as  the  first  element  of  the  diphthong  ai. 
Example  fly,  flai. 

*  There  is  considerable  difference  of  opinion  as  to  tbe  exact  analysis 
of  this  vowel.  Some  regard  c  as  a  tense  vowel  and  ae  as  the  corre-^ 
spending  lax  vowel. 


ENGLISH   SPEECH  SOUNDS   IN   DETAIL  37 

124.  In  ordinary  speaking  the  tongue  usually  does 
not  reach  the  full  i  position  in  pronouncing  this  diphthong, 
so  that  ae  Avould  perhaps  be  a  more  accurate  represen- 
tation of  it.  i  should,  however,  be  aimed  at  in  careful 
speaking  (but  see  §  126). 

125.  In  L  the  first  element  of  this  diphthong  is 
retracted  to  a,  a  (§  130)  or  even  o  (flat,  fLai,  floi).  The 
pronunciation  aei  is  sometimes  heard,  especially  in  N.Eng. 
In  the  best  pronunciation  of  ai,  the  a  should  err  on- 
the  side  of  ae  rather  than  on  the  side  of  a.  Note  the 
pronunciation  a:l  for  Fll,  as  in  Fll  ask  him,  ailaiskim, 
not  unfrequently  heard  from  educated  people  in  rapid 
familiar  conversation. 

126.  ai  sometimes  forms  a  triphthong  (§  203)  with  a 
following  9,  e.g.  fire,  faia.  In  pronouncing  this  triphthong, 
the  tongue  does  not  usually  reach  the  full  i  position ;  aea 
or  aea  would  be  a  nearer  representation  of  the  pronuncia- 
tion usually  heard.  Sometimes  the  assimilation  is  carried 
so  far  that  the  triphthong  becomes  simply  a  lengthened  a 
(represented  phonetically  by  a:),  e.g.  fii^e,  fa:  (distinct 
from  far,  fa:).  This  is  especially  frequent  in  unstressed 
syllables,  e.g.  irate,  a:'reit  for  aia'reit,  aea'reit^. 

127.  In  very  careful  pronunciation  aia  often  does  not 
form  a  triphthong,  but  is  pronounced  as  two  syllables,  ai-a. 
Compare  higher  with  hire,  which  are  both  pronounced  as 
one  syllable  in  ordinary  speaking  (written  phonetically 
haia).  In  such  cases  a  distinction  is  made  in  the  pro- 
nunciation of  the  second  element  of  the  triphthong.  When 
the  group  aia  constitutes  two  syllables,  the  second  element 
is  distinctly  pronounced  as  i.  When  the  group  only  con- 
stitutes one  syllable  the  i  position  is  not  reached,  in  tact 

^  '  denotes  that  the  following  syllable  is  stressed. 


38  PHONETICS 

the  tongue  hardly  rises  above  e.  When  it  is  desired  to 
bring  out  this  distinction  we  can  write  aia  and  aea,  thus 
higher,  haia ;  buyer,  baia ;  but  hire,  haea ;  irony,  aearanl. 
This  is,  however,  not  usually  necessary. 

128.  In  many  dialects,  especially  N  and  W,  the 
triphthong  becomes  aia,  a€,  a:,  aij,  etc.  (see  §§  71,  72). 
a  is  sometimes  used  for  a  (§  148),  but  this  is  not  to  be 
recommended. 

129.  a  (written  a:  when  long).  Open  advanced-back 
unrounded.     Examples /a^Ae?',/ar^/ier,  faitSa. 

130.  In  L  this  sound  is  retracted  to  the  full  back 
position.  This  retracted  vowel  has  a  much  deeper  sound 
than  the  a:  of  StP,  and  may  be  represented  if  desired  by 
a:  (fAi^Ja).  Sometimes  lip-rounding  is  added,  the  sound 
becoming  a  lengthened  o  (§  140)  or  even  o:  (§  142). 

131.  Some  speakers  use  a  or  ae  instead  of  StP  a:  in 
many  words  spelt  with  a  followed  by  n,  f,  or  8,  followed 
in  turn  by  a  consonant  letter,  e.g.  plant,  plant,  plaent; 
ash,  ask;  master,  massta,  etc.  for  StP  plaint,  aisk, 
ma:sta^.  This  is  regularly  done  in  N.  It  is  also  heard 
in  S.Eng.  but  sounds  rather  affected.  Some  elocutionists, 
however,  recommend  the  use  of  a  in  these  cases. 

132.  Some  old-fashioned  speakers  use  S,  (nasalised  a, 
§  25)  in  words  spelt  with  an  followed  by  a  consonant 
letter,  e.g.  plant,  brant/. 

133.  Many  speakers  slightly  diphthongise  a:  especially 
when  final,  e.g.  far,  fa:a,  StP  fa: .  Some  make  a  distinction 
between  words  which  are  and  are  not  spelt  with  the  letter 

^  A  few  words  of  this  kind  are  regularly  pronounced  with  8d  in  StP, 
e.g.  mass,  ant,  macs,  sent.  The  pronunciations  ina:a,  a:at  are  also  heard, 
but  are  not  recommended. 


I 


ENGLISH   SPEECH   SOUNDS   IN   DETAIL  39 

r,  by  diphthongising  the  former,  e.g.  afar,  dfaia,  but  'pa'pa, 
papa:. 

134.  In  many  dialects,  especially  N  and  W,  a  distinc- 
tion is  made  between  words  which  are  and  are  not  spelt 
with  the  letter  r  by  inverting  the  tip  of  the  tongue  in  the 
former  cq&q,  farther  becoming  faiSa,  as  distinguished  from 
father,  faiSa  (see  §§  71,  72). 

135.  The  sound  a  also  occurs  as  the  first  element  of 
the  diphthong  written  au.  Example  how,  hau.  This 
first  element  is  strictly  a  vowel  intermediate  between  a 
and  a. 

186.  In  L  this  diphthong  is  treated  in  two  ways, 
becoming  either  a:  (broad  Cockney),  or  8bu,  sea  or  even 
eu,  ea,  e.g.  get  out,  gitait,  gitaeut,  etc.,  StP  getaut ;  and 
it  is  sometimes  even  reduced  to  ae  or  e,  e.g.  how  are  you 
getting  on?  L  aejagitnon,  StP  haudju:getii]on.  The  StP 
diphthong  is  usually  transcribed  au,  and  there  is  no  great 
objection  to  this,  if  it  is  clearly  understood  that  the  a  is 
with  most  speakers  not  quite  the  same  a  as  in  ai,  but  a 
retracted  variety  rather  like  a.  Pure  a  is  not  unfre- 
quently  heard  in  this  diphthong  from  educated  people, 
but  any  variety  of  a  that  tends  towards  ae  is  not  good :  it 
is  better  to  err  on  the  side  of  a  than  on  that  of  a  (ae), 
and  for  this  reason  the  transcription  au  is  used  in  this 
book  in  preference  to  au. 

137.  au  often  forms  a  triphthong  (§  203)  with  a  fol- 
lowing a.  This  triphthong  aua  is  treated  similarly  to  the 
triphthong  aia.  The  tongue  does  not  usually  reach  the 
full  u  position,  the  usual  pronunciation  being  rather  aoa. 
Sometimes  the  assimilation  is  carried  so  far  that  the  triph- 
thong is  simply  reduced  to  the  first  element  lengthened, 
viz.  a:,  not  very  different  from  the  ordinary  a:  in  fa:9a, 


40  PHONETICS 

e.g.  power,  pau3  becoming  pa:,  very  like  par,  pa:.  This 
is  especially  frequent  in  unstressed  syllables,  e.g.  our  own, 
ai'roun  for  aua'roun  or  aoa'roun. 

138.  In  very  careful  pronunciation  aua  often  does 
not  form  a  triphthong,  but  is  pronounced  as  two  separate 
syllables,  au-a,  compare  tower,  taua  with  hour,  aua,  which 
are  both  pronounced  as  one  syllable  in  ordinary  speech. 
In  such  cases  a  distinction  is  made  in  the  pronunciation 
of  the  second  element  of  the  triphthong.  When  the  group 
constitutes  two  syllables  the  second  element  is  distinctly 
pronounced  u  or  even  w,  and  when  the  group  constitutes 
only  one  syllable,  the  full  u  position  is  not  reached. 
When  it  is  desired  to  bring  out  this  distinction,  we  can 
write  aua,  aoa,  thus,  tower,  taua,  plougher,  plaua,  but 
hour,  aoa.    This  is,  however,  not  usually  necessary. 

139.  In  many  dialects,  especially  N  and  W,  the 
triphthong  becomes  aua,  a:,  auj,  etc.  (see  §§  71,  72). 

140.  o.  Open  back,  with  slight  lip-rounding.  Ex- 
ample hot,  hot. 

141.  In  many  dialects  the  sound  is  pronounced  with- 
out lip-rounding.  It  thus  becomes  the  sound  a  described 
in  §  130.  In  L  o  is  often  replaced  by  o:;  thus  want,  dog, 
StP  wont,  dog  often  become  in  L  wo:nt,  do:g.  In  some 
dialects  the  sound  is  replaced  by  a  or  even  a,  e.g.  in 
America,  where  for  instance  Oxford  (StP  oksfad)  is  pro- 
nounced aksfad.  A  kind  of  o  occurs  as  the  first  element 
of  the  diphthong  oi  (see  §  145). 

142.  o:.  A  vowel  intermediate  between  open  back 
rounded  and  half-open  back  rounded.  Examples  saw, 
sore,  soar,  so:. 

143.  Many  speakers  diphthongise  this  sound,  especially 
when  final,  e.g.  four,  fo:a,  StP  fo:.    Some  make  a  distinc- 


ENGLISH   SPEECH    SOUNDS   IN    DETAIL  41 

tion  between  words  which  are  and  are  not  spelt  with  the 
letter  r,  by  diphthongising  the  former,  e.g.  soar,  sore,  sots, 
but  saw,  so:.  o:a  is  often  used  in  one  or  two  words 
spelt  with  our,  e.g.  mourns  pour,  by  people  who  do  not 
diphthongise  the  sound  o:  in  other  cases.  In  L  o:  is  often 
replaced  by  o:  (§  151),  and  when  final  by  oiwa,  e.g.  fo:wo 
for  fox. 

144.  In  many  dialects,  especially  N  and  W,  a  dis- 
tinction is  made  between  words  which  are  and  are  not 
spelt  with  the  letter  r,  by  inverting  the  tip  of  the  tongue 
in  the  former  case,  sore,  soar  becoming  so:?,  so:,  so: J,  etc. 
(see  §§  71,  72),  distinct  from  saw,  so:. 

145.  The  first  element  of  the  diphthong  oi,  as  in  hoy, 
boi,  is  strictly  a  sound  intermediate  between  o:  and  o. 
Pronunciations  in  which  the  first  element  is  exactly  o: 
or  o  are  dialectal  (the  former  is  common  in  L).  Some 
dialects  substitute  oi  (boil)  (for  o  see  §  150). 

146.  In  many  words  spelt  with  of  or  os  followed  by 
a  consonant  letter,  there  is  hesitation  in  StP  between  o: 
and  o,  e.g.  often,  off,  cross,  lost,  o:  (o:f(ta)n,  kro:s,  etc.)  is 
perhaps  the  most  common,  but  o  (ofl^t9)n,  etc.)  is  generally 
considered  more  elegant.  Many  good  speakers  use  an 
intermediate  vowel  in  these  words.  The  same  applies  to 
salt,  solt  or  so:lt,  gone,  gon  or  go:n.  Because  is  usually 
pronounced  bikoz,  but  many  teachers  recommend  biko:z 
as  more  correct.  Some  make  a  compromise  in  this  word 
and  use  o,  as  in  hot,  lengthened,  which  gives  the  effect 
of  a  sound  intermediate  between  o  and  o:. 

147. .  A.  Half-open  back  unrounded.  Example  rug, 
FAg. 


42  PHONETICS 

148.  In  many  dialects,  including  L,  A  is  replaced  by 
a.  a  is  also  sometimes  heard.  These  are,  however,  not  to 
be  recommended.  In  L  e  is  also  sometimes  substituted 
(e.g.  d5es  set/  for  d5Ast  SAtJ),  and  sometimes  i  (d5is  sit/). 

149.  In  some  words  there  is  hesitation  in  StP  between 
A  and  o,  e.g.  hovel,  hAv(a)l  or  hov(a)l;  dromedary, 
drAHiddari  or  dromadari.  '  In  such  cases  a  is  generally 
preferable.  Wont  is  now  usually  pronounced  wount,  like 
wont    "WAnt  is  old-fashioned. 

160.  o.  Half-close  back  lax  rounded.  In  StP 
this  vowel  generally  occurs  as  the  first  element  of  the 
diphthong  ou,  as  in  no,  nou  (for  u  see  §  162).  It  some- 
times occurs  by  itself  in  unstressed  positions,  e.g.  November, 
novemba  (also  pronounced  nouvemba  or  navemba). 

151.  In  N  this  diphthong  is  tense,  i.e.  the  two 
elements  are  the  tense  vowels  corresponding  to  the  lax 
o,  u.  In  So  the  diphthong  is  not  used,  a  pure  tense 
vowel  (phonetic  symbol  o:)  being  substituted  (no:). 

152.  Many  varieties  of  the  standard  diphthong  ou 
are  found  in  L,  e.g.  ou,  au,  au,  au,  au ;  oh  no  (StP  ou 
nou)  being  pronounced  ou  nou,  au  nau,  etc. 

153.  Sometimes  o  and  u  are  shifted  forwards  into 
the  mixed  position,  becoming  the  half-close  mixed  lax 
rounded,  and  close  mixed  lax  rounded  vowels  respectively 
(phonetic  symbols  o,  ii),  nou  becoming  noii.  Sometimes 
this  pronunciation  of  the  diphthong  is  still  further  modified 
by  unrounding  the  first  element  so  that  it  becomes  the 
half-close  mixed  lax  unrounded  vowel  (phonetic  symbol 
e),  thus  neii.  oii  and  eii  are  heard  in  affected  speech, 
also  sometimes  in  L.  Sometimes  in  educated  speech  o  is 
shifted  even  as  far  as  the  front  position,  especially  when 
unstressed,  becoming  some  variety  of  front  rounded  vowel. 


ENGLISH   SPEECH   SOUNDS   IN   DETAIL  43 

snch  as  the  half-open  front  rounded  vowel  (phonetic  symbol 
ob)  ;  there  is  an  example  in  Part  II,  passage  16,  inoesnt 
for  StP  inosnt  (or  inasnt).  In  L  unstressed  ou  often 
becomes  a,  e.g.  wlnda,  swolarin,  for  windou,  swolouii). 

154.  In  the  best  speaking  care  should  be  taken  to 
round  the  lips  properly  in  pronouncing  ou,  and  not  to 
exaggerate  the  diphthongisation. 

155  u:  Close  back  tense  rounded.  Example  /ood, 
fuid. 

156.  Many  speakers  slightly  diphthongise  the  sound, 
especially  when  final.  This  diphthong  may  be  represented 
by  u:w  or  uw,  e.g.  too,  tu:w  (tuw).  Pure  u:  is,  however, 
preferable. 

157.  In  L  the  vowel  is  regularly  diphthongised,  and 
the  diphthongisation  is  much  more  marked  than  in  StP. 
One  form  is  a  diphthong  beginning  with  a  very  lax  u 
(§  162)  and  finishing  with  a  tenser  u  or  w.  Another  variety 
is  produced  by  complete  unrounding  of  the  first  element 
of  this  latter  diphthong  (the  phonetic  symbol  for  unrounded 
u  is  in),  e.g.  ftuwd  or  fuiud. 

158.  Other  common  varieties  are  formed  by  advancing 
the  tongue  towards  the  mixed  position.  The  symbol  for 
the  close  mixed  lax  rounded  vowel  is  ii,  and  the  corre- 
sponding unrounded  vowel  is  represented  by  'i,  and  the 
diphthong  often  becomes  raii,  iiw,  or  iii,  e.g.  StP  hu:9ju: 
(who  are  you?)  becomes  miiajuiu  or  iiiajiu.  Sometimes 
the  first  element  is  advanced  as  far  as  the  front  position, 
becoming  i,  e.g.  tjiuz  for  StP  tjuiz.  All  these  varieties 
arc  objectionable. 

159.  In  the  best  speaking  care  must  be  taken  to 
round  the  lips  well,  and  to  keep  the  tongue  as  far  back 
as  possible. 


44  PHONETICS 

160.  Some  use  u:  as  the  first  element  of  the  diphthong 
heard  in  poor,  pua,  thus  pu:d.  u  (§  162)  is,  however, 
preferable. 

161.  The  sound  u:  when  represented  by  the  letters 
u,  eUj  ew,  ui  is  often  preceded  by  J  in  StP,  e.g.  tune, 
Ijuin,  suit,  sjuit.  In  many  dialects,  including  L,  this  j  is 
often  omitted  (tiiwii,  smiit,  etc.).  The  rule  relating  to 
insertion  of  this  j  in  StP  is  as  follows,  j  is  not  inserted 
when  the  preceding  consonant  is  r,  /,  or  5,  or  when  the 
preceding  consonant  is  1  preceded  in  turn  by  a  consonant, 
e.g.  rule,  chew,  June,  blu£,  ru:l,  t/u:,  d5u:n,  blu:,  not 
rjuil,  t/ju:,  etc.  When  the  preceding  consonant  is  1  not 
])receded  in  turn  by  a  consonant,  usage  varies,  e.g.  lute, 
Ijuit  or  lu:t.  It  is  generally  considered  more  elegant  to 
insert  the  j,  though  it  is  perhaps  more  usual  in  conver- 
sational pronunciation  not  to  do  so.  In  other  cases  j  is 
regularly  inserted. 

162.  u.  Close  back  lax  rounded.  Example  good. 
gud. 

163.  In  Sc  u  is  generally  replaced  by  u:.  In  St? 
besides  occurring  independently,  the  sound  u  occurs  as  the 
first  element  of  the  diphthong  ua.  Example  poor,  pua. 
This  diphthong  is  often  pronounced  u:a  (and  in  many 
dialects,  especially  N  and  W,  u:a,  uu,  etc.,  §§71,  72),  but 
ua  is  preferable.  Other  varieties  not  unfrequently  heard 
from  educated  speakers  in  London  are  oa  and  o:  (poa,  po:). 
This  latter  pronunciation  is  usual  in  the  word  your,  jua 
or  Jo:.  In  other  cases  it  is  not  to  be  recommended ^ 
a:  (§  166)  is  sometimes  substituted  for  ua  in  the  words 
sure,  curious  (/a:,  ljja:rias  for  StP  /ua,  kjuarias). 

^  The  group  us  does  not  always  form  a  diphthong,  e.g.  in  influence, 
inflaons,  where  the  two  sounds  belong  to  different  syllables ;  in  such 
cas3S  there  is  no  tendency  to  replace  the  group  ua  by  »:. 


ENGLISH   SPEECH   SOUNDS   IN   DETAIL  45 

164.  In  StP  J  is  inserted  before  ua  in  the  same  cases 
as  before  u:  (§  161),  e.g.  rural,  niarol,  sure,  Jua,  jury, 
d5uari,  plural,  pluaral;  lure,  Ijua  or  lua  (the  first  of 
these  two  pronunciations  being  preferable);  cure,  kjua, 
fury,  fjuari. 

165.  u  also  occurs  in  the  diphthongs  au,  ou  (§§  135, 
150). 

16G.  a:.  Half-open  mixed  tense  unrounded.  The 
tongue  is  perhaps  slightly  higher  than  the  exact  half-open 
position^     Examples  fir,  fur,  fa:. 

167.  Some  speakers  endeavour  artificially  to  make  a 
difference  between  words  spelt  with  ur  and  those  spelt 
with  ir,  er,  ear,  etc.,  by  using  a  lowered  variety  of  a: 
(phonetic  symbol  a^:)  in  the  former  case,  and  a  raised 
variety  (phonetic  symbol  a^:)  in  the  latter,  e.g.  fur,  fa^i, 
but  fir,  pearl,  fa-"-:,  pe^il,  etc. 

168.  a:  is  generally  replaced  by  the  lowered  variety 
a^:  in  L. 

169.  In  many  dialects,  especially  N  and  W,  the  sound 
becomes  a:  (§§  71,  72). 

170.  The  word  girl  is  pronounced  in  a  great  many 
different  ways  by  educated  people.  ga:l  is  the  most 
common,  geal  is  very  frequently  used,  especially  by  ladies. 
Other  varieties  are  gial,  gsal,  j.a:l,  a-eal,  etc.  (3.  is  the 
voiced  palatal  plosive,  §  46) ;  in  N  and  W  etc.  ga:l,  ge?!, 
etc.  (§§  71,  72) ;  in  Sc  gerl.  In  vulgar  speech  the  following 
forms  may  also  be  heard,  ga^:!,  gaeal,  gael,  gel,  gel. 


*  Some  regard  this  vowel  as  open.  This  cannot  well  be  the  case, 
because  if  the  mouth  is  opened  as  widely  as  possible  o:  cannot  be 
pronounced  properly,  whereas  open  vowels  such  as  o,  a,  a,  ae  can  be 
pronounced  perfectly  well. 


46  PHONETICS 

171.  9.  Half-open  mixed  lax  unrounded.  Examples : 
over,  ouva,  alight,  alait. 

172.  This  sound  varies  slightly  in  quality  according 
to  its  position.  When  final,  the  tongue  is  rather  lower 
than  in  other  cases;  compare  the  a  sounds  in  the  above 
two  examples.  It  is  not  generally  necessary  to  mark  these 
variations  in  practical  phonetic  transcriptions.  Some 
speakers  actually  replace  a  when  final  by  a,  thus  making 
the  two  vowels  in  butter  (StP  bAta)  identical  (bAtA).  In 
many  dialects,  especially  N  and  W,  a  is  replaced  by  a,  i.e. 
a  pronounced  with  simultaneous  inversion  of  the  tip  of 
the  tongue  (§  71),  in  cases  where  the  vowel  letter  in  the 
spelling  is  followed  by  r  +  a  consonant  or  r  final,  proverb, 
provab  becoming  provab,  tojether,  tageVa  becoming 
tagetSa. 

173.  a  is  only  used  in  unstressed  syllables.  Cases 
occur  in  which  almost  all  other  vowels  may  be  reduced 
to  a  when  unstressed.     Thus: 

e  becomes  o  in  moment,  moumant,  compare  momentous,  ino(ti)xnent9s 


ae        „ 

„       miracle,  mirdkl,             ,, 

miraculous,  miraBlsJulds 

O'-         » 

„       vineyard,  vini9d,           ,, 

yard,  Ja:d 

O'           u 

„       cupboard,  kAbad,            „ 

board,  bo:d 

ou       „ 

„        Gladstone,  glsedston,     „ 

stone,  stoun 

o:         >i 

„       proverb,  prsvdb,             ,, 

proverbial,  pravdibjal 

174.  i:  and  i  are  not  generally  reduced  to  a  when 
unstressed,  except  in  the  word  the  when  followed  by  a 
word  beginning  with  a  consonant,  as  in  the  man,  5a  msn, 
and  in  the  termination  -ible,  e.g.  possible,  posibl  or  posabl. 
i  generally  remains  unchanged  and  i:  tends  to  become  i 
when  unstressed;  thus  receive  is  pronounced  risi:v  (cp. 
however  precede,  pri:si:d),  latin,  Isetin.  Pronunciations 
like  rasi:v,  lst(a)n,  are  heard,  but  are  dialectal. 


ENGLISH  SPEECH  SOUNDS   IN   DETAIL 


47 


175.  In  very  careful  speaking  there  is,  in  many  cases, 
a  tendency  to  replace  a  by  strong  vowels,  i.e.  vowels  which 
can  occur  in  stressed  syllables.  The  result  is  that  several 
new  vowels  are  introduced,  viz.  sounds  intermediate  in 
acoustic  effect  between  various  strong  vowels  and  the 
weak  vowel  a.  Thus,  in  very  careful  speaking,  moment 
would  not  be  pronounced  either  moumant,  as  in  ordinary 
conversation,  or  moument,  but  the  last  vowel  would  be 
something  intermediate  in  acoustic  effect  between  a  and  e. 
This  vowel  is  practically  the  same  as  the  sound  e  referred 
to  in  §  153.  Similarly,  the  first  vowel  in  acknowledge 
would  not  be  a  as  in  ordinary  pronunciation  (aknolids), 
but  something  intermediate  between  a  and  aB.  This 
intermediate  vowel  may  be  conveniently  represented  by  ». 
Similar  vowels  occur  which  are  intermediate  between  i  and 
a,  a  and  a,  o:  or  o  and  a,  a:  and  a.  The  first  of  these  is 
practiially  the  same  as  the  sound  i  referred  to  in  §  158. 
The  second,  third  and  fourth  may  be  represented  by  d,  o, 
and  a.  The  sound  intermediate  between  u:  and  a  is 
u,  and  that  intermediate  between  ou  and  a  is  the  first 
element  o.     Examples : 

horrible,  conversational  pronun.  lior»bl,  careful  prouun.  horibl 

vineyard  ,,  ,,        vinjad        ,,  ,,        vi^jad 

forget 

offend 

exercise 

obey 

today 

176.  It  is  very  important  to  use  these  intermediate 
vowels  correctly  in  the  declamatory  style  of  speaking.  If 
ordinary  strong  vowels  are  used  in  their  place  undue 
prominence  is  given  to  unimportant  syllables,  as  when 
untrained  curates  say  tu  aeknolidj  an  konfes  where 
they  should  say  tu  aeknolid5  send  konfes.      On  the 


faget          M 

,        fISget 

afend          „             , 

,       ofend 

elcsasaiz    ,,             , 

eksSsaiz 

abei             „            , 

,        obei 

tod«i 

tndei 

48  PHONETICS 

other  hand,  if  a  is  used  just  as  in  ordinary  conversation 
the  utterance  becomes  obscure  and  the  pronunciation  may 
even  sound  vulgar. 

177.  The  existence  of  these  vowels  renders  the  pho- 
netic transcription  of  the  declamatory  style  of  English 
rather  complicated.  This  is,  however,  unavoidable.  For 
this  reason  students  should  start  with  transcriptions  in 
conversational  style  and  make  themselves  thoroughly 
familiar  with  this  before  proceeding  to  the  declamatory 
style. 

178.  In  cases  where  diphthongs  are  reduced  to  a  in 
conversational  pronunciation,  the  full  strong  form  is  used 
in  careful  speaking.  Thus  in  declamatory  style  the  word 
hy  would  always  be  pronounced  bai  and  never  reduced  to 
b3  as  it  often  is  in  conversational  pronunciation,  e.g.  ta 
sel  tiam  ba  "Sa  paund. 

V.     NASALISATION 

179.  Nasalised  sounds  (§  25)  do  not  occur  in  StP. 
They  are  sometimes  heard  as  individual  or  dialectal 
peculiarities.  The  symbol  of  nasalisation  is  *  placed 
over  the  symbol  of  the  sound  which  is  nasalised. 

180.  In  L  vowels  are  generally  nasalised  when  fol- 
lowed by  nasal  consonants,  e.g.  Arerit  you  coming?  StP 
aint  Ju:  kAmir)  becomes  in  L  alnt  /a  kamin.  Sometimes 
the  nasal  consonant  is  dropped,  especially  when  w  follows ; 
thus  /  don't  want  it,  StP  ai  dount  wont  it,  often  becomes 
in  L  Ai  dau  woint  it.  Sometimes  all  vowels,  or  at  any 
rate  all  the  more  open  vowels,  are  nasalised  independently 
of  any  nasal  consonant ;  this  produces  what  is  called  nasal 
twang. 


NASALISATION.      ASSIMILATION  49 

181.  Those  who  habitually  nasalise  their  vowels^  often 
liave  difiSculty  in  getting  rid  of  the  fault.  It  can  only  be 
cured  by  constant  practice  of  isolated  vowel  sounds.  It  is 
better  to  start  practising  with  close  vowels,  there  being 
less  tendency  to  nasalise  these.  When  a  pure  i:  and  u: 
can  be  produced,  which  should  not  require  much  practice, 
the  opener  vowels  may  be  rendered  pure  by  exercises  such 
as  i:ei:e...u:ou:o...  pronounced  without  a  break  of  any 
kind  between  the  i:  and  e,  u:  and  o,  etc.  Half-open  and 
open  vowels  may  be  practised  in  the  same  way.  When 
all  the  isolated  vowels  can  be  pronounced  without  nasal- 
isation, easy  words  should  be  practised.  The  greatest 
difficulty  will  probably  be  found  in  words  in  which  the 
vowel  is  followed  by  a  nasal  consonant,  e.g.  can,  kaen; 
such  words  should  therefore  be  reserved  till  the  last.  In 
practising  the  word  can  a  complete  break  should  at  first 
be  made  between  the  SB  and  the  n,  kaB-n;  this  interval 
may  be  gradually  reduced  until  at  last  there  is  no  break 
whatever.  Other  words  containing  vowels  followed  by 
nasal  consonants  may  be  practised  in  a  similar  way. 

VI.     ASSIMILATION 

182.  When  a  sound  is  influenced  by  another  sound 
near  it,  it  is  said  to  undergo  an  assimilation.  Various 
kinds  of  assimilation  are  met  with  in  English.  The 
principal  are: 

183.  (1)  Assimilations  from  breath  to  voice  or  voice 
to  breath. 

184.  In  raspberry,  raizbari  the  p  has  dropped  out 
and  the  s  has  been  voiced  under  the  influence  of  the 

*  We  are  here  speaking  of  nasalisation  which  is  merely  the  result  of 
habit  and  not  due  to  any  physical  defect. 

J.  4 


•50  PHONETICS 

following  voiced  consonant  b,  thus  becoming  z.  In.  dogs, 
dogz  the  plural  termination  is  pronounced  z  (see,  how- 
ever, §  239) ;  this  is  due  to  the  influence  of  the  preceding 
voiced  consonant  (cp.  cats,  kaets).  Pronunciations  such 
as  sidaun  for  sitdaun  are  due  to  assimilation  of  the  t  to 
d  under  the  influence  of  the  following  d. 

185.  Partial  assimilation  of  voice  to  breath  regularly 
occurs  where  a  liquid  or  semi-vowel  is  preceded  by  a 
breathed  consonant  in  the  same  syllable;  e.g.  in  small, 
smo:l,  snuff,  buaT,  place,  pleis,  sweet,  swi:t,  try,  trai, 
jyew,  pju:,  the  consonants  m,  n,  1,  w,  r  (which  here  =  j),  j 
are  partially  devocalised,  the  sounds  beginning  breathed 
and  ending  voiced.  With  some  speakers  the  assimilation 
is  complete,  the  words  becoming  s^o:l,  s^Af,  pleis,  SMi:t, 
taai,  P9u:. 

186.  An  assimilation  of  a  similar  kind  occurs  when 
tj,  sj  become  t/,  /  (§§  101,  100).  A  simple  assimilation 
of  tongue-position  (§§  191,  192)  would  change  J  to  3. 
There  is,  however,  in  addition  a  de vocalisation  under  the 
influence  of  the  preceding  breathed  consonant. 

187.  (2)  Nasalisations  under  the  influence  of  a  nasal 
consonant,  e.g.  the  nasalisation  of  vowels  w^hen  followed 
by  a  nasal  consonant  referred  to  in  §  180.  The  disappear- 
ance of  d  in  kindness,  kainnis,  grandmother,  grsnmAVa 
is  due  to  this;  when  the  d  is  nasalised  it  becomes  n, 
which  then  readily  disappears. 

188.  (3)  Assimilations  affecting  the  position  of  the 
tongue. 

189.  The  k  sound  in  key,  ki:  is  more  advanced  than 
the  k  sound  in  cot,  kot.     This  is  readily  heard  if  we 


ASSIMILATION 


51 


whisper  the  words.  The  advancement  in  the  case  of  ki: 
is  due  to  the  influence  of  the  front  vowel  i:.  The  n 
sound  in  month,  mAn9  is  formed  against  the  teeth  under 
tlie  influence  of  the  9,  and  not  against  the  upper  gums 
like  the  normal  n  sound. 

190.     In  these  cases  the  character  of  the  sound  is 
not  greatly  altered  by  the  assimilation.     In  certain  cases, 


Z(8) 


5^f) 


Fig.  9.    Diagram  illustrating  the  Assimilation  of  j  to  jfj)  under 
the  influence  of  ^(s)^ 

however,  the  sound  is  considerably  modified.  A  common 
one  is  the  assimilation  of  s(z)  to  J(5)  under  the  influence 
of  a  following  J(5) ;  thus  liorseshoe,  does  she  are  generally 

^  For  the  sake  of  clearness  the  mouth  has  been  drawn  wide  open.  As 
a  matter  of  fact,  in  pronouncing  z(8)  and  ^(J)  the  teeth  are  generally 
almost  in  contact. 

4—2 


62  PHONETICS 

pronounced  ho:J/u:,  dAjJi:,  not  hoisju:,  dAzJi:.  Another 
case  is  the  change  of  n  to  i]  under  the  influence  of  a 
preceding  or  following  velar  consonant — bacon,  beikT]  (§  59); 
congress,  koTjgres  (compare  congratulate,  kangrstjuleit). 
Another  is  that  of  k,  g  to  t,  d  under  the  influence  of  a 
following  1,  e.g.  tli:n  dlAVZ  for  kliin  glAVZ  {clean  gloves), 
(This  latter  assimilation  should  be  avoided.) 

191.  Another  very  common  assimilation  is  that  of  j 
to  5(/)  under  the  influence  of  a  preceding  z(s)  or  d(t) 
(§§  100,  101).  5(/)  is  intermediate  in  tongue-position 
between  z(s)  and  j.  Hence  the  coalition  of  z(s)  and  j 
naturally  gives  3(/),  see  fig.  9. 

192.  The  tongue-position  for  d(t)  is  much  the  same 
as  that  for  z(s),  except  that  actual  contact  is  made  by  the 
tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  upper  gums.  The  d(t)  has 
therefore  influenced  the  j  by  drawing  the  front  of  the 
tongue  somewhat  downwards,  thus  changing  the  sound 
into  5(/). 

193.  (4)  Assimilations  aflfecting  the  position  of  the 
lips. 

194.  The  k  in  quite,  kwalt  is  pronounced  with  lip- 
rounding  under  the  influence  of  the  following  w.  A 
labio-dental  nasal  consonant  is  sometimes  used  instead 
of  m,  when  followed  by  f  or  v,  as  in  comfort,  kAmfat. 
n  sometimes  becomes  m  under  the  influence  of  a  preceding 
labial,  e.g.  oupm  for  oup(a)n. 

VII.     QUANTITY 

195.  All  sounds  may  be  continued  during  a  shorter 
or  longer  period.  For  practical  purposes  it  is  sufficient  to 
distinguish  two  or  at  most  three  degrees  of  quantity  {long 
and  short,  or  long,  half-long  and  short). 


QUAXTTTY  53 

196.     The  rules  of  quantity  in  standard  English  are : 

(1)  i:,  a:,  o:,  u:,  a:  arc  long  in  stressed  syllables 
when  final  or  followed  by  a  voiced  consonant,  e.g.  in  sea 
si:,  seed,  si:d,  far,  fa:,  halve,  ha:v,  lose,  lu:z,  two,  tu:. 
They  are  reduced  to  half-length  (1)  when  followed  by  a 
breathed  consonant,  e.g.  seat,  si:t,  half,  ha:f,  loose,  lu:s, 
(2)  when  quite  unstressed  (§  205),  e.g.  linseed  oil,  'linsi:d- 
'oil\  (3)  when  followed  by  another  vowel,  e.g.  deist,  di:ist. 
In  the  second  case  the  vowels  sometimes  become  quite 
short,  especially  when  a  breathed  consonant  follows,  as  in 
economy,  i:'konami;  authority,  oi'Ooriti. 

(2)  i,  e,  ae,  o,  a,  u  are  generally  short  but  become 
half-long  when  stressed  and  followed  by  a  voiced  con- 
sonant other  than  a  liquid,  compare  pit,  pit,  pig,  pig,  pin, 
pin.  9  (which  is  always  unstressed)  and  unstressed  1  are 
practically  always  short.  Some  speakers,  however,  lengthen 
them  slightly  when  final,  and  when  followed  by  a  voiced 
consonant  in  a  final  syllable,  as  in  manners,  maendz, 
carry,  kseri. 

(3)  Diphthongs  may  be  long  or  short.  They  are 
treated  like  the  vowels  1:,  a:,  etc.,  becoming  short  in  the 
cases  where  1:,  a:,  etc.  become  half-long.  Compare  the 
words  high,  hai,  hide,  haid,  in  which  the  diphthong  ai  is 
long,  with  height,  hait,  idea,  ai'dia,  in  which  it  is  short. 

(4)  Consonants  are  slightly  lengthened  when  final 
and  preceded  by  i,  e,  ae,  o,  a,  or  u.  Compare  seen,  si:n 
with  sin,  sin.  Liquids  are  lengthened  when  followed  by 
a  voiced  consonant  in  the  same  syllable,  e.g.  wind,  wind, 
cp.  hint,  hint. 

^  '  denotes  that  the  following  syllable  is  stressed. 


54  PHONETICS 

(5)     Syllabic  consonants  are  always  unstressed,  and 
like  the  vowel  a  are  practically  always  short  (see  (2)). 

197.  These  rules  are  only  approximate.  It  is  not 
difficult  to  distinguish  five  or  six  degrees  of  quantity  if 
we  wish :  thus  the  i:  in  siin  is  clearly  intermediate  between 
the  long  i:  in  seize,  si:z  and  the  half-long  i:  in  seat,  si:t ; 
the  o:  in  scald,  skoild  is  shorter  than  the  long  o:  in  saw, 
so:,  but  longer  than  the  half-long  o:  in  halt,  h3:lt;  the 
9  in  manners,  msenaz  is  longer  than  the  9  in  callous, 
kslas,  but  is  hardly  half-long.  The  rules  given  are, 
however,  sufficiently  exact  for  practical  purposes.  In  fact 
it  is  often  sufficient  to  generalise  still  further  by  dis- 
tinguishing only  two  degrees  of  length,  and  taking  as  the 
general  rule  tliat  in  standard  English  the  sounds  i:,  a:, 
o:,  u:,  a:  are  long  and  all  other  sounds  are  short. 

(Note.  It  is  in  consequence  of  this  approximate  rule 
that  we  are  able  to  represent  the  sounds  ii,  o:,  u:,  a:  by 
means  of  the  symbols  i,  o,  u,  a  followed  by  the  mark  :. 
:  is  strictly  speaking  the  symbol  of  length,  and  has  nothing 
to  do  with  the  quality  of  sounds.  If  the  above  rule  did 
not  exist,  we  should  be  obliged  to  have  separate  symbols 
to  distinguish  i:  from  i,  o:  fi*om  o,  etc. ;  and  even  as  it  is, 
it  is  sometimes  necessary  to  have  such  separate  symbols, 
when  great  accuracy  is  required;  see  for  instance  the 
transcriptions  in  the  author's  Intonation  Curves  (Teubner, 
Leipzig).  Generally  speaking,  however,  the  insertion  of 
the  length  mark  :  is  sufficient  to  render  confusion  im- 
possible.) 


SYLLABLES  55 


VITI.     SYLLABLES 


198.  When  two  sounds  are  separated  by  one  or  more 
sounds  less  sonorous  than  either  of  them,  they  are  said  to 
belong  to  different  syllables.  The  relative  sonority  or 
carrying  power  of  sounds  depends  chiefly  on  their  quality, 
and  to  some  extent  on  the  force  of  the  breath  with  which 
they  are  pronounced.  When  there  is  no  great  variation 
in  the  force  of  the  breath,  vowels  are  more  sonorous 
than  consonants;  open  vowels  are  more  sonorous  than 
close  vowels;  voiced  consonants  are  more  sonorous  than 
breathed  consonants;  voiced  liquid  consonants  are  more 
sonorous  than  other  voiced  consonants. 

199.  The  most  sonorous  sound  in  a  syllable  is  said  to 
be  syllabic.  The  syllabic  sound  of  a  syllable  is  generally 
a  vowel,  but  is  occasionally  a  consonant  (as  in  the  second 
syllables  of  people,  pi:pl,  written,  ritn).  Syllabic  conso- 
nants are  marked  when  necessary  by  ,  placed  under  the 
consonant  symbol.  It  is  however  only  necessary  when  a 
vowel  follows.  Thus  it  must  be  inserted  in  glAt^i  (the 
alternative  pronunciation  of  gluttony,  glAtani)  to  show 
that  it  does  not  rhyme  with  chutnee,  t/Atni;  but  the 
mark  is  quite  superfluous  in  pi:pl,  because  the  1  cannot 
be  sounded  in  this  position  without  being  syllabic. 

200.  Syllabic  sounds  are  generally  separated  by  con- 
sonants. When  two  consecutive  vowels  belong  to  two 
syllables  as  in  create,  kri:-eit,  there  must  be  either  a  slight 
decrease  in  the  force  of  the  breath  between  them  or  an 

nsertion  of  a  trace  of  some  consonant  or  consonantal  vowel 
(§  202).  In  kri:eit  there  is  usually  a  slight  j  inserted 
between  the  i:  and  the  e,  though  it  is  not  sufficient  to 


56  PHONETICS 

mark  in  a  practical  phonetic  transcription;  in  gnawer, 
no:-a,  the  division  between  the  syllables  is  marked  rather 
by  a  slight  diminution  in  the  force  of  the  breath. 

201.  When  two  vowels  are  not  separated  either  by 
a  consonantal  sound  or  by  a  decrease  in  the  force  of  the 
breath,  they  cannot  constitute  more  than  one  syllable. 
They  are  then  said  to  form  a  diphthong. 

202.  The  least  sonorous  vowel  in  a  diphthong  (whether 
the  sonority  is  due  to  vowel-quality  or  to  force  of  the 
breath  or  to  a  combination  of  the  two)  is  said  to  be 
consonantal.  Thus  in  the  diphthongs  ai,  ea,  the  i  and 
9  are  the  consonantal  elements. 

203.  When  in  a  group  of  three  vowels  not  separated 
either  by  consonantal  sounds  or  decrease  in  the  force  of 
the  breath  the  second  is  opener  than  either  of  the  others, 
we  have  a  true  triphthong.  An  example  of  a  true 
triphthong  is  oae  (a  careless  way  of  pronouncing  the 
word  why,  (h)wai). 

204.  The  groups  aia,  aua  are  not  true  triphthongs ; 
i  and  u  are  less  sonorous  than  a,  a  and  a,  and  therefore 
the  a,  a  and  a  belong  to  different  syllables  (§  198).  When 
the  second  element  of  these  groups  is  lowered  (§§  126, 137) 
they  approach  nearer  to  true  triphthongs,  but  they  never 
become  true  triphthongs.  In  their  extreme  forms  they 
become  diphthongs  (aa,  aa)  or  single  vowels  (a:,  a:) 
(§§  126,  137).  It  is  however  convenient  to  call  the  groups 
aia,  aua  triphthongs,  because  they  are  often  treated  in 
poetry  as  forming  only  one  syllable. 


STRESS  67 


IX.     STRESS 


205.  The  force  of  the  breath  with  which  a  syllable  is 
pronounced  is  called  stress.  Stress  varies  from  syllable  to 
syllable.  Syllables  which  are  pronounced  mth  greater 
stress  than  the  neighbouring  syllables  are  said  to  be 
stressed. 

20G.  It  is  possible  to  distinguish  many  degrees  of 
stress;  if  we  use  the  figure  1  to  denote  the  strongest 
stress,  2  to  denote  the  second  strongest  and  so  on,  the 
stress  of  the  word  opportunity  might  be  marked  thus: 

2     4       16   3 

opstjuiniti.  Such  accuracy  is,  however,  not  necessary 
for  practical  purposes ;  it  is  in  fact  generally  sufficient  to 
distinguish  two  degrees  only — stressed  and  unstressed. 
Stressed  syllables  are  marked  when  necessary  by '  placed 
immediately  before  them,  thus  father,  'fa:^a,  arrive, 
a'raiv,  opportunity,  opa'tjuiniti,  what  shall  we  do? 
'(h)wot/alwi:'du:. 

207.  The  same  words  and  sentences  are  not  always 
stressed  in  the  same  way.  Variations  are  sometimes 
necessary  for  making  the  meaning  clear,  and  they  are 
sometimes  due  to  rhythmical  considerations.  Thus  the 
word  injudicious  when  simply  taken  to  mean  "foolish" 
would  have  the  stress  on  the  third  syllable,  thus  he  was 
very  injudicious,  hi:waz'veriind5u:'dijas,  but  when  used 
in  contrast  with  judicious,  the  chief  stress  would  be  on 
the  first  syllable,  the  stress  on  the  third  being  only  secon- 
dary, e.g.  that  was  very  judicious,  SaBtwaz'verid5u:'di/as, 
answer  /  should  call  it  very  injudicious,  'ai/adkoilitveri- 
'ind5u:di/as.  Untrained  speakers  often  fail  to  bring  out 
contrasts  of  this  kind  properly. 


58  PHONETICS 

208.  In  '(h)wot/alwi:'du:,  (h)wot'/8Blwi:'du:, 
'(h)wotJal'wi:du:,  the  variations  of  stress  actually  modify 
the  meaning  of  the  words. 

209.  The  word  unknoim,  Announ  shows  clearly  how 
rhythm  may  affect  stress.  Compare  an  unknown  land, 
dn'Announ'laend  with  quite  unknown,  'kwaitAn'noun. 
When  isolated  the  word  would  generally  be  pronounced 
'An'noun,  the  two  syllables  having  equal  stress.  Tlie 
rhythmical  principle  underlying  these  changes  is  a  tendency 
to  avoid  consecutive  stressed  syllables  when  possible. 

210.  When  we  wish  to  emphafiize  a  whole  word  (not 
any  special  part  of  it,  such  as  the  in-  of  injudicious),  we 
usually  increase  the  amount  of  stress  on  the  syllable 
which  is  normally  stressed.  Thus  when  magnificent, 
maeg'nifisant  is  pronounced  with  great  emphasis,  the 
second  syllable  receives  a  very  strong  stress,  although  it 
is  a  very  unimportant  syllable  from  the  point  of  view 
of  the  meaning.  Occasionally  an  additional  stress  is  put 
on  some  syllable  other  than  that  which  is  normally 
stressed,  e.g.  absolutely  when  emphasized  is  sometimes 
pronounced  'aBbs3'l(j)u:tli  instead  of  'aBb8al(j)u:tli. 

X.     BREATH-GROUPS 

211.  Pauses  occur  at  frequent  intervals  in  speaking. 
They  are  made  (1)  for  the  purpose  of  taking  breath,  (2)  for 
the  purpose  of  making  the  meaning  of  the  words  clearer. 

212.  Groups  of  sounds  which  are  pronounced  with- 
out pause  are  called  breath-groups.  The  following  are 
examples  of  breath-groups:  Yes,  jes;  Good  morning, 
gud'mo:niT) ;  Shall  we  go  out  for  a  walkl,  '/aelwiigou- 
'autfar&'tvaik ;  Shall  lue  go  out  for  a  walk  or  shall  we 


imEATU-GROUPS.      INTONATION  69 

stay  at  homel,  '/sBlwiigou'autfara'woikoiJalwii'steiat- 

'houm.  The  last  of  these  would  often  be  divided  into 
two  breath-groups  if  spoken  slowly,  a  pause  (not  neces- 
sarily a  pause  for  taking  breath)  being  made  after  the 
word  wo:k. 

213.  Pauses  for  breath  should  always  be  made  at 
points  where  pauses  are  necessary  or  permissible  from 
the  point  of  view  of  meaning.  Untrained  speakers  often 
arrange  their  breath-groups  badly,  taking  breath  and 
making  other  pauses  in  wrong  places. 

214.  The  proper  divisions  between  breath-groups  are 
generally  indicated  in  writing  by  the  punctuation  niarks. 
In  phonetic  transcriptions  it  is  often  useful  to  mark  the 
limits  of  breath-groups  by  ||,  and  |  may  be  used  to  mark 
points  where  a  slight  pause  may  be  made  but  is  not  essen- 
tial. Thus,  What  shall  we  do  ?  Shall  we  go  out  for  a  walk 
or  shall  we  stay  at  home?  may  be  written  || '(h)wot/alwi:- 
'du:  II  '/a9lwi:gou'autfara'wo:k  |  oijalwii'steiat'houm  || 


XL     INTONATION 

215.  In  speaking,  the  pitch  of  the  voice,  i.e.  the  pitch 
of  the  musical  note  produced  by  the  vocal  chords,  is 
constantly  changing.  These  variations  in  pitch  are  called 
intonation  (or  inflection).  Intonation  is  thus  quite  inde- 
pendent of  stress  (§  205),  with  which  it  is  sometimes  con- 
fused by  beginners.  There  is  of  course  no  intonation  when 
breathed  sounds  are  pronounced.  The  number  of  these  is 
however  small  compared  with  the  voiced  sounds,  so  that 
the  intonation  in  any  ordinary  breath-group  may  be 
regarded  as  practically  continuous. 


60  PHONETICS 

216.  When  the  pitch  of  the  voice  rises  we  have  a 
rising  intonation ;  when  it  falls  we  have  a  falling  intona- 
tion ;  when  it  remains  on  one  note  for  an  appreciable 
time,  we  have  level  intonation.  Level  intonation  is  rare 
in  ordinary  speaking,  but  is  not  uncommon  in  serious 
recitation. 

217.  The  range  of  intonation  is  very  extensive.  Most 
people  in  speaking  reach  notes  much  higher  and  much 
lower  than  they  can  sing.  The  range  is  as  a  general  rule 
greater  in  declamatory  style  than  in  conversational  style. 
In  declamatory  style  it  is  not  unusual  for  a  man  with  a 
voice  of  ordinary  pitch  to  have  a  range  of  intonation  of  over 

two  octaves,  rising  to  F  /^\.    "^      -  or  even  higher,  and  going 

down  so  low  that  the  voice  degenerates  into  a  kind  of  growl 
which  can  hardly  be  regarded  as  a  musical  sound  at  all.  In 
the  case  of  ladies'  voices  the  range  of  intonation  does  not 
often  exceed  IJ  octaves,  the  average  limits  in  declamatory 

218.  The  only  satisfactory  way  of  representing  in- 
tonation is  by  means  of  a  curved  line,  which  rises  as  the 
pitch  rises  and  falls  as  the  pitch  falls,  placed  immediately 
above  the  line  of  phonetic  transcription. 

219.  Intonation  is  most  important  for  indicating 
shades  of  meaning.     Compare  tl?e  following: 

high  pitch 

low  pitch      ^^>w      meaning  "  That  is  so."  ^ 

je» 


style  being  about  D  X^     I        and  G 


INTONATION  61 

1.  p J!w meaning  "  Of  course  it  is  so." 

jes 


h.p 

I.  p ^~ „         "Is  it  really  so  ?  " 

jes 


ZZ 


1.  p \^ —       „         "  That  may  be  so.* 

Jes 

hp>  


I.  p ^V>  expressmg  curiosity. 

'(h)wot9ju:'du:iT) 


t.p. 

1.  p.  =^ —        „  anger. 

'(h)w3taju:'du:if) 


pleasure. 
(h)wota'bju:tafl'dei 

h.p. 


1.  p.  -^  used  sarcastically. 

'(h)wotabju:t9fldei 

220.    The  most  important  rules  of  intonetion  are: 
1.    A  falling  intonation  is  used  at  the  end  of 
(1)    Complete  commands, 
h.p.  

1.  p.  ^^ Come  here. 

'kAm'liia 


62 


PHONETICS 


(2)  Complete  statements,  i.e.  statements  which 
do  not  imply  any  continuation  or  rejoinder. 

h.p. 

l.p. 

wi:v'd5AstkAm'in        'wiivdSAStkAm'in 

We  have  just  come  in, 

(3)  Complete  questions  containing  a  specific  in- 
terrogative word  or  phrase. 

h.  p . . 

l.p. 


'(h)wotaju:'du:iT| 


(h)wotd'ju:du:iT) 


(h)wota'ju:du:iTf)         (h)wot'a:ju:'du:iT) 

What  are  you  doing  ? 
(4)    The  last  of  two  or  more  alternative  questions, 
h.p ^ 

/8Blwi:goufara'wo:klo:rd'raid|o:rd'draiv 

Shall  we  go  for  a  walk,  or  a  ride,  or  a  drive? 
If  a  rising  intonation  were  used  on  draiv,  a  further 
alternative  would  be  implied. 

2.     A  rising  intonation  is  used  at  the  end  of 

(1)  Unfinished  commands,  statements  and  ques- 
tions, i.e.  where  a  continuation,  rejoinder  or  answer  is 
expressed  or  implied. 

h.p ^ 

'sain€3'peiparan(d/teikitt9'5i:'ofis 

Sign  the  paper,  and  take  it  to  the  office. 
(Rising  intonation  on  peipa.) 


INTONATIONS 


ea 


itwaz'fain'jestadibat'wettJadeibi'fo: 

U  was  fine  yesterday,  but  wet  the  day  before. 
(Rising  intonation  on  jestadi.) 

b.  p   

'wAn'tu:'eri:To;'faiv 

One,  two,  three,  four,  five  (counting  slowly). 
(Rising  intonations  on  WAn,  tu:,  Sri:,  fo:.) 
See  also  the  example  1  (4). 

(2)  Complete  questions  not  containing  a  specific 
^  interrogative  word  or  phrase. 

h-  P . ^ 

'/aelwiigou'autnau        '/selwi:gouaut'nau 

Shall  we  go  out  now  / 

(3)  Dependent    clauses,    where    the    principal 
clause  follows  or  is  suppressed. 

h.  p. 

1.  p. 

( h  )weiiQ3' wa:ks!£lni  j  thi:lkAm'baek 

When  the  luork  is  finished,  he  will  come  back. 

(Rising  intonation  on  fini/t.) 

h.p. 

1.  p. 

and'ifjui'dount 

And  if  you  don% — . 

221.     When  not  affected  by  the  above  rules  stressed 
"syllables  generally  have  a  higher  pitch  than  unstressed. 


64  PHONETICS 

222.  The  efteut  of  a  rising  intonation  is  greater  if  it 
is  immediately  preceded  by  a  falling  intonation,  and  the 
effect  of  a  falling  intonation  is  greater  if  it  is  immediately 
preceded  by  a  rising  intonation.     Thus 


Are  you  going  f 
'a:ju:'gouiTj 

is  more  emphatic  than 

b.p 

I.  p.  ^ 


'a;Ju:'gouiT) 

Compare  also 

h.p.  __ 


a;ju:'9ouiT) 

is  more  emphatic  still 


itwaz'sb8dl(j)u:tUim'pos9bl 


with  ^-  P- 


ZX 


itwdZ'sbs3l(j)u:tliim'posdbl 

It  was  absolutely  impossible. 


223.  Many  untrained  speakers  use  a  rising  intonation 
at  the  end  of  sentences  where  a  falling  intonation  should 
be  used.  This  may  be  individual  habit  or  dialectal  pecu- 
liarity (it  is  very  common  in  Sc  and  N).  The  fault  can 
only  be  cured  by  practising  very  exaggerated  falling 
intonations,  practising  at  first  if  necessary  by  simply 
singing  descending  scales  of  notes. 


THEORY  OF  PLOSIVE  CONSONANTS  65 

XIT.     THEORY   OF   PLOSIVE   CONSONANTS 

224.  To  pronounce  a  complete  plosive  consonant 
(§  17)  two  things  are  essential:  (1)  Contact  must  be 
made  by  the  articulating  organs,  (2)  The  articulating 
organs  must  be  subsequently  separated.  Thus,  in  pro- 
nouncing p  the  lips  must  be  first  closed  and  then  opened. 
The  explosion  of  a  plosive  consonant  is  formed  by  the  air 
as  it  rushes  out  at  the  instant  when  contact  is  released ; 
the  air,  however,  necessarily  continues  to  escape  for  an 
appreciable  time  after  the  actual  explosion,  thus  giving 
rise  to  an  independent  sound.  A  plosive  consonant  there- 
fore cannot  be  properly  pronounced  without  being  followed 
by  another  independent  sound.  This  independent  sound 
may  be  breathed  or  voiced. 

225.  When  a  voiced  plosive  consonant,  e.g.  b,  is 
followed  by  a  vowel,  the  vowel  itself  constitutes  the 
necessary  independent  sound.  It  is  possible  to  pronounce 
a  breathed  plosive,  e.g.  p,  followed  by  a  vowel,  in  such  a 
way  that  the  vowel  constitutes  the  additional  sound 
necessary  for  the  proper  pronunciation  of  the  consonant. 
This  is,  however,  not  usually  done  in  English,  a  short  h 
sound  being  generally  inserted  before  the  commencement 
of  the  vowef(§§  30,  34,  42).  Similarly  the  first  part  of  a 
following  voiced  consonant  is  generally  devocalised  (§  185) ; 
it  is  however  possible  to  pronounce  a  group  such  as  pi  in 
such  a  way  that  the  voice  begins  at  the  instant  of  the 
explosion. 

226.  When  we  try  to  pronounce  a  breathed  plosive, 
e.g.  p,  by  itself,  it  is  generally  followed  by  a  short  breathed 
sound  h;  when  we  try  to  pronounce  a  voiced  plosive, 
e.g.  b,  by  itself,  it  is  generally  followed  by  a  short  vowel  a. 

J,  5 


66  PHONETICS 

227.  It  is  sometimes  convenient  to  represent  sounds 
of  very  short  duration  by  symbols  in  very  small  type. 
Thus  the  group  usually  represented  by  pa:  would  be 
more  accurately  represented  by  phai.  When  we  try  to 
pronounce  p  and  b  by  themselves  we  really  say  pn,  bo. 
The  word  praise,  preiz  would  be  more  accurately  repre- 
sented by  pfreiz. 

228.  The  time  during  which  the  articulating  organs 
are  actually  in  contact  may  be  termed  the  stop.  In  the 
case  of  the  breathed  consonants,  e.g.  p,  nothing  whatever 
is  heard  during  the  stop ;  in  the  case  of  the  voiced  con- 
sonants, e.g.  b,  some  voice  is  usually  heard  during  the 
stop. 

229.  In  English  there  are  cases  in  which  plosive 
consonants  are  not  fully  articulated,  where  in  fact,  stops 
occur  without  explosions.  The  most  important  of  these 
cases  is  where  a  plosive  consonant  is  immediately  followed 
by  another  plosive  consonant.  Thus  in  the  StP  of  the 
word  act,  aBkt,  the  tongue  does  not  leave  the  roof  of  the 
mouth  in  passing  from  the  k  to  the  t.  There  is  therefore 
no  explosion  of  the  k,  only  the  stop  being  pronounced. 
He  will  act  too  is  usually  pronounced  hi: wilaekttu: ,  with 
no  explosion  to  the  k  or  to  the  first  t  (the  first  t  is  in  fact 
only  indicated  by  a  silence).  Similarly  in  begged,  begd, 
there  is  no  explosion  to  the  g. 

230.  In  that  time,  tSaettaim,  red  deer,  reddid,  the 
first  t  and  d  are  not  exploded  in  StP,  in  fact  the  only 
difference  between  the  tt  and  dd  in  these  examples  and 
the  t,  d  in  satire,  saetaia,  red  ear,  'red'ia,  readier,  'redla, 
is  that  in  the  former  case  the  stop  is  very  much  longer 
than  in  the  latter.  Similar  considerations  apply  to  the 
groups  pp,  bb,  kk,  gg. 


THEORY   OF   PLOSIVE   CONSONANTS  67 

231.  In  apt,  sept,  ebbed,  ebd,  the  t,  d  are  formed 
while  the  lips  are  still  closed  for  the  p,  b.  The  result  is 
that  no  h  or  a  sound  is  heard  when  the  lips  are  separated  ^. 
In  ink-pot,  iijkpot,  big  boy,  bigboi,  the  lips  are  closed  for 
the  p,  b  during  the  stop  of  the  k,  g.  The  result  is  that 
no  explosion  of  the  k  or  g  is  heard.  Similar  considerations 
apply  to  all  other  groups  of  two  plosive  consonants  articu- 
lated in  different  parts  of  the  mouth. 

232.  The  td  in  that  day,  tSaetdei,  only  differs  from 
the  d  in  faddy,  faedi,  in  having  a  longer  stop,  the  first 
part  of  which  is  breathed.  In  tJaetdei,  midday,  middei, 
the  stops  are  of  the  same  length,  but  in  the  former  the 
first  part  of  the  stop  is  breathed  and  the  second  part 
voiced,  while  in  the  latter  the  stop  is  voiced  throughout. 
The  sound  of  dt  in  bedtime,  bedtaim  only  differs  from 
the  t  in  better,  beta  in  having  a  longer  stop,  the  first  part 
of  which  is  voiced.  In  bedtaim,  ^aettaim,  the  stops  are 
of  the  same  length,  but  in  the  former  the  first  part  of  the 
stop  is  voiced  and  the  second  part  breathed,  while  in  the 
latter  the  stop  is  breathed  throughout.  Similar  considera- 
tions apply  to  the  groups  pb,  bp,  kg,  gk. 

233.  Pronunciations  such  as  aekhtntu:,  begad,  tSaetb- 
taim,  rededia,  aep&t,  ebed,  iTjkupot,  bigoboi,  tSaetudeij 
bedbtaim  are  heard,  but  are  generally  dialectal.  Some- 
times, however,  such  b,  e  sounds  are  inserted  in  very  careful 
speaking  when  it  is  advisable  to  mark  very  clearly  the 
beginnings  and  ends  of  words.  Thus,  in  reading  aloud  to 
a  large  audience,  aekttu:  might  be  pronounced  SBktbtu:. 

234.  When  a  plosive  is  followed  by  a  nasal  consonant 

^  A  noise  is  sometimes  heard  as  the  lips  separate :  this  is  howevei* 
not  formed  by  an  escape  of  breath,  but  is  due  to  the  moisture  on  the  lips. 

5—2 


68  PHONETICS 

as  in  that  night,  tJaetnait,  topmost,  topmoust,  utmosty 
Atmoust,  Wednesday,  wednzdi,  the  action  of  the  articu- 
lating organs  is  the  same  as  in  the  case  of  a  plosive 
followed  by  a  plosive.  Thus  no  t  or  o  is  inserted  between 
the  t  and  n,  p  and  m,  t  and  m,  d  and  n  in  the  above 
examples;  pronunciations  such  as  tophmoust  are  as  a 
rule  dialectal,  but  are  occasionally  heard  in  careful  speak- 
ing when  special  distinctness  is  desired. 

235.  There  is  an  explosion  in  the  ordinary  pronuncia- 
tion of  these  combinations  of  plosive  and  nasal.  This  is 
not,  however,  formed  at  the  point  of  the  mouth  where 
closure  is  made,  but  is  due  to  the  lowering  of  the  soft 
palate  which  causes  the  air  to  escape  suddenly  through 
the  nose. 

236.  When  a  voiced  plosive  consonant  is  initial,  the 
stop  is  often  partially  devocalised,  i.e.  the  first  part  of  it  is 
breathed,  voice  being  only  added  just  before  the  explosion. 
When  the  speaker  is  speaking  softly,  there  is  usually  no 
voice  at  all  during  the  stop.  The  resulting  sound  differs 
from  the  corresponding  breathed  plosive  in  being  pro- 
nounced with  less  force  of  the  breath  and  being  followed 
immediately  by  voice,  i.e.  a  vowel  or  a  voiced  consonant. 
(Breathed  plosive  consonants  are  immediately  followed  by 
breath,  i.e.  h  or  a  breathed  consonant,  §  225.)  In  careful 
speaking  the  stop  of  an  initial  voiced  plosive  should  be 
fully  voiced. 

237.  When  a  voiced  plosive  consonant  is  said  to  be 
final  it  is  really  followed  by  another  sound  (§§  224,  226) ^ 
The  sound  which  is  really  final  is  e  or  n,  more  often  the 

1  The  pronunciation  of  the  stop  alone  in  final  plosives  may  be  some- 
times observed  in  individual  cases,  but  can  hardly  be  considered  normal. 


i 


INITIAL   AND   FINAL   VOICED   FRICATIVES  69 

latter,  especially  when  the  voiced  plosive  is  preceded  by 
another  consonant,  thus  cab  is  pronounced  kaebe  or  kaebb, 
hold  is  generally  houldh,  occasionally  (especially  in  decla- 
matory style)  houldo. 

238.  Sometimes  voice  is  not  heard  during  the  whole 
stop  of  a  final  voiced  plosive,  but  only  during  the  first 
part  of  it.  The  sound  then  resembles  a  feebly  articulated 
breathed  plosive.  When  the  consonant  in  question  is 
preceded  by  another  consonant  it  fi-equently  happens 
that  no  voice  is  produced  during  the  stop  at  all,  •  i.e. 
the  consonant  is  completely  devocalised.  (Devocalisation 
is  represented  phonetically  by  ^  under  the  symbol  for 
the  voiced  sound.)  Thus  in  hould  the  d  is  sometimes 
completely  devocalised  and  becomes  a  very  weak  kind  of 
t  (hould).  This  is  still  more  frequent  when  there  are  two 
preceding  consonants  as  in  cleansed,  klenzd.  or  klenzd. 
When  great  distinctness  is  desired  final  voiced  plosives 
should  be  fully  voiced. 

XIII.     INITIAL  AND  FINAL  VOICED  FRICATIVES 

239.  When  a  voiced  pure  fricative  (§  105),  e.g.  z,  is 
initial  or  final,  it  is  generally  not  fully  voiced.  When 
initial  as  in  zeal,  zi:l,  it  begins  breathed  and  ends  voiced, 
and  when  final,  as  in  ease,  i:z,  it  begins  voiced  and  ends 
breathed.  When  final  and  preceded  by  another  consonant, 
e.g.  in  heads,  hedz,  valves,  vaelvz,  it  is  often  completely 
devocalised,  becoming  a  weak  kind  of  s  (phonetic  symbol 
j),  these  words  being  more  accurately  written  hedz,  vaelvz 
or  vsBlvz.  When  great  distinctness  is  desired,  initial  and 
final  voiced  fricatives  should  be  fully  voiced. 


PART  II 

PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 


I.     STANDARD   PRONUNCIATION i 

A.  CAREFUL  CONVERSATIONAL  STYLE 

1.    Charlotte  Bronte 

Passage  from  Jane  Eyre,  Chap,  xxxv 

'oil  59  'haus  waz  'stil ;  far  ai  biliiv  'o:l  iksept  'sindjan 
ond  mai'self  wa  'nau  ri'taiad  ta  'rest.  Sa  'wAn  'ksendl  waz 
'daiirj  'aut;  ?5a  'rum  waz 'ful  av 'muinlait.  mai 'ha:t  bi:t 
'fa:st  and  '6ik ;  ai  'ha:d  its  'Grab.  'sAdnli  it  'stud  'stil  tu 
an  iniks'presibP  'fidirj  Sat  '8rild  it  'Gru:  and  'pa:st  at 
'wAns  ta  mai  'bed  and  iks'tremitiz.  Sa  fiilir)  waz  'not  laik 
an  i'lektrik  'Jok,  bat  it  waz  'kwait  az  '/a:p,  az  'streinds, 
az  'stcLitlir) ;  it  'aektid  on  mai  'sensiz  az  if  Sear  'Atmoust 
aek'tiviti  hiSa'tu:  had  bi:n  bat  'to;pa,  fram  (h)wit/  Sei  wa 
'nau  'sAmand  and  'foist  tu  'weik.  Sei  'rouz  iks'pektant;  'ai 
and  'ia  'weitid  (h)wail  Sa  'flej  'kwivad  on  mai  'bounz. 

"  '(h)wot  (h)av  ju:  'ha;d  ?  '(h)vvot  d(a)  ju:  'si:  ? "  a;skt 
'sindgan.  ai  'so;  'nAGir),  bat  ai  'haid  a  'vois  'sAm(h)wea  'krai 
"  'd3ein,  'd3ein,  'd3ein  ! " — ^'nAQir)  'mo:. 

"'ou  'god  !  '(h)wot  'iz  it  ? "  ai  'ga:spt. 

ai  'mait  (h)av  sed,  "  '(h)wear  iz  it  ? "  far  it  'did  not  si:m 
in  Sa  'rum,  no:r  in  Sa  'haus,  no:r  in  Sa  'ga:dn ;  it  'did  not 
kAm  aut  av  Si  'ea,  no:  fram  Anda  Si  'a:G,  no:  fram  ouva'hed. 

*  As  defined  in  Part  1,  §  1.  ^  Often  pronounced  iniks'presobl. 


74  PHONETIC   TRANSCRIPTIONS 

ai  (h)8d  'hard  it — '(h)w£8,  oi  '(h)wens\  far  'ev9(r)  im'posibl'^ 
ta  'nou  !  and  it  waz  Sa  vois  av  a  'hjuiman  'bi;ir) — a  'noun, 
'1a vd,  'welri'membad  'vois — 'Sset  av  'edwad  'feafaeks  'rot/ista ; 
and  it  spouk  in  'pein  and  'wou,  'waildli,  'iarili,  'a;d3antli. 

"'ai  am  'kAmir)!**  ai  kraid,  "'weit  fa  mi;!  'ou,  ai  wil 
'kAm!"  ai  'flu:  ta  Sa  'do;,  and  'lukt  inta  Sa  'poesidg ;  it 
waz  'da;k.     ai  'raen  'aut  inta  Sa  'ga;dn;  it  waz  'void. 

"'(h)wear  'a;  ju;?"   ai  iks'kleimd. 

iSa  'hilz  bi'jond  'ma;/  'glen  'sent  Si  'cL;nsa  'feintli  'baek, 
"'(h) wear  'a;  ju;?"  ai  'lisnd.  Sa  'wind  'said  'lou  in  Sa 
'fa;z;  'o:l  waz  'mualand  'lounlinis  and  'midnait  '1ia/. 


2.    Edmund  Burke 
A  passage  from  Thoughts  on  the  Fi^ench  Revolution 

it  iz  'nau  'siksti;n  o;  'sevnti;n  'jiaz'*  sins  ai  'so;  Sa  'kwi;n 
av  'fra;ns,  'Sen  Sa  'do;finis,  at  vsr'sa;j ;  and  'Juali  'neva 
'laitid  on  Sis  'o;b,  (h)wit/  Ji;  'ha;dli  si;md  ta  'tAtJ,  a  mo; 
di'laitful  'vi3an.  ai  'so:  ha:  'djAst  a'bAv  Sa  ha'raizn, 
'dekareitir)  and  't/iarir)  Si;  'eliveitid  'sfia  Ji;  'djAst  bi'gsen 
ta  'mu:v  in, — 'glitarir)  laik  Sa  'mo:nir)  'sta:,  'ful  av  'laif, 
and  'splenda,  and  'djoi.  'ou !  (h)wot  a  reva'l(j)u:/n !  and 
(h)wot  a  'hcL;t  mast  ai  haev  ta  'kontempleit  wiS'aut  i'mou/n 
Saet  eli'vei/n  and  Saet  'fo;l !  'litl  did  ai  'dri;m  (h)wen  /i: 
'sedid  'taitlz  av  vena'rei/n  ta  Souz  av  ineju;zi'aestik,  'distant, 
ri'spektful  'Iav,  Sat  Ji;  Jud  'eva  bi:  a'blaidgd  ta  'kaeri  Sa 
'/a;p  'centidout  ageinst  dis'greis  kan'si;ld  in  Saet  'buzam; 
'litl  did  ai  'dri;m  Sat  ai  Jad  (h)av  'livd  ta  'si;  'sAtJ  di'za;staz 
fo:lan  apon  ha;(r)  in  a  'nei/n  av  'gaelant  'men,  in  a  'nei/n  av 

1  Or  '(h)wcor  o:  '(li)wens.  ^  Qften  pronounced  im'posabl. 

»  Or  'jo:z. 


STANDARD   PRONUNCIATION.      STYLE   A  75 

men  av  'ona,  and  av  kosva'liaz.  ai  0o:t  'ten  'Oauzond  'so:dz 
iHAst  hav  'lept  fram  Sea  'sksebadz  tu  a'ven(d)3  i:vn  a  'luk 
Sat  'Oretnd  ha;  wis  'insAlt. 

bat  Si;  'eid3  av  't/ivalri  iz  'gon.  Sast  av  'sofistaz, 
i;'konamists,  and  'kselkjuleitaz,  haz  sak'si;did ;  and  Sa  'cjlo;ri 
av  'juarap  iz  iks'tirjgwi/t  far  'eva.  'neva,  'neva  'mo;  Jal  wi: 
bi'hould  Sget  'd3enaras  'loialti  ta  'raerjk  and  'seks,  Soet  'praud 
saVmi/n,  Sset  'dignifaid  a'biidjans^,  Sset  saboidi'nei/n  av  Sa 
'ha;t,  (h)witj  'kept  a'laiv,  i;vn  in  'sa:vitju:d  it'self,  Sa  'spirit 
av  an  ig'zo;ltid  'fri;dara.  Si:  'Anbo;t  'greis  av  'laif,  Sa  't/iip 
di'fens  av'nei/nz,  Sa  'na:s  av  'mgenli  'sentimant  and  hi'rouik 
'entapraiz,  iz  'gon  !  it  iz  'gon,  Sset  sensi'biliti  av  'prinsipl^ 
Saet  't/sestiti  av  'ona,  (h)wit/  'felt  a  'stein  laik  a  'wu;nd, 
(h)wit/  in'spaiad  'kAridg  (h)wailst  it  'mitigeitid  fi'rositi, 
(h)wit/  i'noubld  (h)wotevar  it  'tAt/t,  and  Anda  (ti)wit/  'vais 
it'self  'lo;st  'ha;f  its  'i;vil,  bai  lu;zir)  'o;l  its  'grousnis. 

3.     C.  S.  Calverley 

Contentment 
(after  the  manner  of  Horace)^ 
'frend,  Sea  bi:  'Sei  on  hu:m  'mishsep 

o;  'neva  o;  'sou  'reali  'kAmz, 
Saet,  (h)wen  Sei  '0ir)k  Searof,  Sei  'snsep 
di'raisiv  '6Amz; 

send  Sea  bi;  'Sei  hu:  'laitli  'lu;z 
Sear  'o;l,  jet  'fi;l  'nou  'eikig  'void; 

Jud  'o:t  a'noi  Sam,  Sei  ri'fju;z 
ta  bi;  a'noid; 

1  Or  o'blicUons.  a  Qr  'prinsspl. 

3  Reproduced  from  Calverley's  Fly  Leaves  by  kind  permission  of  the 
publishers,  Messrs  George  Bell  and  Sons. 


76  PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 

9nd  'fein  wud  'ai  bi:  i:n  az  'Si:z! 

'laif  iz  wis  'sAtJ  'o:l  'biar  and  'skitlz; 
6ei  a:  'not  'difiklt  ta  'pli:z 

abaut  Bea  'vitlz; 

6a  'trcLut,  t5a  'graus,  Ci:  'a:li  'pii, 
bai  'sAt/,  'if  'Ssa,  a:  'fridi  'teikan; 

'if  'not,  (5ei  'mAn(t)J  wiS  'i:kwal  'gli: 
Sea  'bit  av  'beikan; 

and  (h)wen  Sei  'waeks  a  litl  'gei 

and  't/a:f  Sa  'pAblik  a;fta  'lAn(t)/an, 

if  Sea  kan'frAntid  wis  a  'strei 
pa'li.'smanz  'trAn(t)Jan, 

Sei  'geiz  Searset  wiS  'CLutstret/t  'neks, 

and  'la:fta  (h)wit/  'nou  'Grets  kan  'smASa, 

and  'tel  Sa  'horastrikan  'eks 
Sat  'hi;z  a'nASa. 

in  'snoutaim  if  Sei  'kro:s^  a  'spot 
(h)wear  'Ansas'pektid  'boiz  hav  'slid, 

Sei  'fo:l  not  'daun — ^'Sou  Sei  wud  'not 
'maind  if  Sei  'did ; 

(h)wen  Sa  'sprig  'rouzbAd  (h)wit/  Sei  'wea 
'breiks  '/o:t  and  'tAmblz  fram  its  'stem, 

'nou  '6o:t  av  biiig  'aeggri  'ea 
'do:nz  apan  'Sem; 

'Sou  twaz  d/ji'maimaz  'haend  Sat  'pleist, 
(az  'wel  ju:  'wi:n)  at  'i:vnigz  'aua, 

in  Sa  'lAvd  'bAtnhoul  Sset  't/eist 
and  't/eri/t  'flaua. 

1  Or  'kro». 


STANDARD   PRONUNCIATION.      STYLE  A  77 

end  (h)wen  ?5ei  'trsevl,  if  Sei  'faind 
Sat  Sei  hav  'left  Sea  'pokit'kAmpas 

o:  'mAri  o:  '0ik  'bu:ts  bihaind, 
t5ei  'reiz  'nou  'rAmpas, 

bat  'plod  si'ri:nli  'on  wiS'aut; 

'nouir)  its  'beta  tu  in'djua 
Si:  'i:vil  (h)wit/  bijond  'oil  'daut 

ju:  'ksenot  'kjua. 

(h)wen  fa  Sset  'a:li  'trein  Sea  'leit, 
Sei  du:  not  'meik  Sea  'wouz  Sa  'tekst 

av  'saimanz  in  Sa  'taimz,  bat  'weit 
'on  fa  Sa  'nekst; 

and  'djAmp  in'said,  and  'ounli  'grin 

Jud  it  a'pia  Sat  'Sset  'drai  'wseg, 
Sa  'ga:d,  o'mitid  ta  'put  'in 

Sea  'kaipitbseg. 


4.    Sir  Walter  Scott 

Hunting  Song 

'weikan,  'loidz  and  'leidiz  'gei, 
on  Sa  'mauntin  'domz  Sa  'dei; 
'o:l  Sa  'd3oli  't/eis  iz  'hia 
wis  'hoik,  and  'ho:s,  and  'hAntirj'spia ! 
'haundz  a:r  in  Sea  'kAplz  'jelig, 
'ho:ks  a:  '(h)wislir),  'ho:nz  a:  'nelig; 
'merili,  'merili  'mirjgl  Sei, 
'"weikan,  'loidz  and  'leidiz  'gei/' 


78  PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 

'weikan,  'lo:dz  and  'leidiz  'gei, 
Sa  'mist  haz  'left  Sa  'mauntin  'grei; 
'sprirjlits  in  Sa  'do:n  a:  'stiimir), 
'daiamandz  on  Sa  'breik  a:  'cjli:mir); 
and  'foristaz  hav  'bizi  'bi:n 
ta  'trsek  6a  'bAk  in  'Oikit  'grim; 
'nan  wi:  'kAm  ta  't/amt  aua  'lei, 
"'weikan,  'lo:dz  and  'leidiz  'gei." 

'weikan,  'loidz  and  'leidiz  'gei, 
ta  Sa  'griniwud  'heist  a'wei; 
'wi:  kan  'Jou  ju:  (h)wea  hi;  'laiz, 
'fliit  av  'fut  and  'tod  av  'saiz; 
wi:  kan  'Jou  t5a  'ma:ks  hi:  'meid, 
(h)wen  geinst  Si  'ouk  hiz  'aentlaz  'freid; 
'ju:  Jal  'si:  him  'bro:t  ta  'bei, 
"'weikan,  'lo:dz  and  'leidiz  'gei/* 

'lauda,  'lauda  't/cL:nt  Sa  'lei, 
'weikan,  'lo:dz  and  'leidiz  'gei! 
'tel  Sam,.'ju:9,  and  'ma;0,  and  'gli; 
'rAn  a  'ko:s,  az  'wel  az  'wi:; 
'taim,  'sta:n  'hAntsman!    'hu:  kan  'bo:k, 
'sto:n(t)/  az  'haund,  and  'fli:t  az  'ho:k; 
'yirjk  av  'Sis,  and  'raiz  wiS  'dei, 
'd3entl  'lo:dz  and  'leidiz  'gei. 


STANDARD   PRONUNCIATION.      STYLE   A  79 

5.    W.  M.  Thackeray 
A  passage  from  the  Essay  on  Whitebait 

ai  W8Z  'ri.-sntli  'to;kir)  in  a  veri  'tAtJir)  and  po(uyetikl 
'strein  abaut  Si:  a'bAV  'delikit  'fij  ta  mai  frend  'fu:zl  and 
sam  'A?5az  at  6a  'kUb,  and  iks'pei/ieitir)  apan  Si:  'eksalans 
av  Sa  'dina  (h)\vit/  aua  'litl  'frend  'gAtlbari  had  'givn  as, 
(h)wen  'fu:zl,  'lukir)  'raund  a'baut  him  wiS  an  'ear  av 
'traiamf  and  i'mens  'vvizdam,  'sed, — 

"ail  'tel  ju:  'wot,  wsegstcL:f,  'aim  a  'plein  'msen,  and 
dis'paiz  o:l  jo;^  'goimandaizir)  and  'kik/o:z.  ai  'dount  nou 
Sa  'difrans  bitwiin  'wAn  av  joir^  ab'said  'meid  'di/iz  and 
a'nASa;  'giv  mi:  a  'plein  'kAt  av  'mAtn  o:  'bi:f.  aim  o 
'plein  'irjglijman,  'ai  sem,  an(d)  'nou  'gUtn." 

'fu:zl,  ai  sei,  '6o:t  'Sis  'spi:t/  a  'teribF  'set  'daun  fa  'mi: ; 
{end  in'di:d  'sektid  Ap  ta  hiz  'prinsiplz*.  ju:  mei  'si:  (h)im 
'eni  'dei  at  'siks  'sitir)  'daun  bifoir  a  'greit  'ri:kiT)  'dgoint  av 
'mi:t ;  hiz  'aiz  'kwivarirj,  hiz  'feis  'red,  and  'hi:  'kAtirj  'greit 
'smoukir)  'red  'kolaps  ciut  av  Sa  'bi:f  bi'fo:  him^  (h)wit/ 
(h)i:  di'vauaz  wis  koris'pondir)  'kwontitiz  av  'ksebidg  an(d) 
pa'teitouz,  and  Si:  'A(5a  'greitis  'Uk/uriz  av  Sa  'kUb'teibl. 

'(h)wot  ai  kam'plein  ov  'iz,  'not  Sat  Sa  ma3n  Jud  in'd3oi 
hiz  'greit  'mi:l  av  'sti:mir)  'bi:f — 'let  (h)im  bi  'hsepi  ouva 
'Saet,  az  mAtJ  az  Sa  'bi:f  hi:  iz  di'vauarir)  waz  in  'laif  'hsepi 
Guvar  'oil'keiks  o:  'm8er)gl'wa:zl — bat  ai  'heit  Sa  felouz 
'bru:tl  'selfkam'pleisnsi,  and  hiz  'sko:n  av  'ASa  'pi:pl  hu: 
hoev  'difrant  'teists  fram  'hiz.  a  'maen  hu:  'brsegz  riga:dir) 
himself,  Sat  (h)wot'eva  hi:  'swolouz  iz  Sa  'seim  to  'him,  and 

*  Or  jua.  -  Or  jusr. 

^  Often  pronounced  'terabl.  *  Or  tu  iz  'prinsoplz. 

*  Or  bi'fb:riin. 


80  PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 

b'at  'hiz  'ko:s  'pselit  'rekegnaiziz  'nou  'difrans  bitwiin  'venzn 
9n(d)  'taitl,  'pudir),  o:  'mAtn'bro:0,  aez  hiz  in'difrant  'd3o;z 
'klouz  'ouva  Sam,  'brjEgz  abaut  a  'paisnl  di'fekt — tSa  'ret J — 
an(d)  'not  abaut  8  'vaitju:.  it  iz^  'laik  a  'msen  'boustir) 
tJat  (h)i:  hsez  'nou  'ia  fa  'mjuizik,  o:  'nou  'ai  fa  'kAla,  o:  Sat 
(h)iz  'nouz  'ksenot  'sent  Sa  'difrans  bitwiin  a  'rouz  and  a 
'ksebidj.  ai  'sei,  az  a  'dgenaral  'ru:l,  'set  'Sset  'mgen  'daun 
az  a  kan'si:tid  'felou  hui  'swsegaz  abaut  'not  'kearir)  fa  hiz' 
'dina. 

'(h)wai  '/udnt  wi:  ksar  abaut  it  ?  waz  'i:tir)  'not  'meid 
ta  bi:  a  'plesa  tu  as  ?  'jes,  ai  sei,  a  'deili  'plesa — a  'swi;t 
sou'leimen — a  'ple3a  fa'milja,  jet  'eva  'nju: ;  Sa  'seim,  and 
'jet  hau  'difrant !  it  iz  'wAn  av  Sa  'koiziz  av  doumes'tisiti. 
Sa  'ni:t  'dina  meiks  Sa  'hAzband  'pliizd,  Sa  'hauswaif  'haepi ; 
Sa  't/ildran  konsikwantli  a:  'wel  bro:t  'Ap,  and  'Iav  tSea 
pa'pa;  an(d)  ma'ma:.  a  'gud  'dina(r)  iz  5a  'sen tar  av  5a 
'sa:kl  av  5a  'soujl  'simpa9iz.  it  'wo;mz  e'kweintans/ip^ 
inta  'fren(d)/ip ;  it  mein'teinz  53et  'fren(d)/ip  'kAmfatabli 
'Anim'pead ;  'enimiz  'mi:t  ouvar  it  and  a:  'rekansaild.  'hau 
'meni  av  'ju;,  dia  frendz,  haz  53et  'leit  'botl  av  'klserat 
'wo:md  intu  a'fek/anit  fa'givnis,  'tenda  reka'lek/anz  av 
'ould  'taimz,  and  'a:d(a)nt  'glouir)  aentisi'peijnz  av  'nju: ! 
5a  'brein  iz  a  tri'mendas  'siikrit.  ai  bili:v  'sAm  'kimist* 
wil  'raiz  a'non  bu:  wil  'nou  hau  ta  'dokta  5a  'brein  sbz 
5ei  du:  5a  'bodi  'nau,  sez  'li:big^  doktaz  6a  'graund.  5ei 
wil  a'plai  'sa:tn  'medsinz,  and  pra'dju:s  'krops  av  'saitn 
'kwolitiz  5at  a:  'laiig  'do:mant  'nau  fa  'wont  av  inti'lektjual 
'gwa:nou.    bat  '5is  iz  a  SAbd^ikt  fa  'fjuit/a  spekju'lei/n — 

1  Or  it  8.  '  Or  for  Iz. 

*  Or  o'kweintonjjip. 

*  Or  'kemlst. 

»  The  name  is  strictly  'liitolf  (for  f  see  Part  I,  §  99). 


STANDARD  PRONUNCIATION.      STYLE   A  81 

0  pa'renGisis 'grouif)  'aut  av  8'nA?5apa'renOisis;  '(h) wot  ai  wud 
'8;d2  i'spe/eli  'hi8(r)  iz  a  'point  (h)wit/ 'mAst  bi  fa'milja  wiS 
'evri  'paisn  a'kAstamd  tu  'i:t  'gud  'dinaz — 'neimli,  Sa  'noubl 
and  'frendli  'kwolitiz  Sat  (5ei  i'lisit.  'hau  'iz  it  wi:  'kAt  sAt/ 
'dgouks  ouva  Sam  ?  'hau  'iz  it  wi;  bikAm  sou  ri'ma:kabli 
'frendli  ?  'hau  'iz  it  Sat  'sAm  av  as,  in'spaiad  bai  a  'gud 
'dina,  haev  'sAdn  'gAsts  av  'd^iinjas  'An'noun  in  Sa  'kwaiat 
'An'festiv  'steit?  'saih  men  meik  'spi:t/iz;  'sAm  'Jeik  Sea 
'neiba  bai  Sa  'haend,  and  in'vait  him,  o:  Sam'selvz,  ta  'dain ; 
'SAm  'sir)  pra'did3asli ;  mai  frend  'sseladin,  far  instans,  'gouz 
'houm,  hi:  sez,  wiS  Sa  moust  'bjuitafl  'ha:maniz  'rirjirj  in 
(h)iz  'iaz;  and  'ai,  fa  'mai  pa:t,  wil  teik  'eni  'givn 'tju;n, 
an(d)  'meik  veari'ei/nz  apon  it  far  'eni  'givn  'piariad  av 
'auaz,  'greitli,  nou  daut,  ta  Sa  di'lait  av  'oil  'hiaraz.  'Si:z 
ar  'ounli  'temparari  inspi'rei/nz^  'givn  as  bai  Sa  'djoli 
'd3i:njas,  bat  'a:  Sei  ta  bi;  dis'paizd  on  'Saet  akaunt  ?  'nou. 
'gud  'dinaz  (h)av  bi;n  Sa  'greitist  'viiiklz  av  bi'nevalans 
sins  'maen  bi'gaen  tu  'i;t. 

8  'teist  fa  'gud  'livir),  Sen,  iz  'preizwa:Si  in  moda'rei/n — 
laik  'o:l  Si:  'ASa  'kwolitiz  and  in'daumants  av  'maen.  'if  a 
msen  wa  ta  ni'glekt  (h)iz  'faemili  o:  hiz^  'biznis  on  akaunt 
av  (h)iz  'Iav  fa  Sa  'fidl  o;  Sa  'fain  'a:ts,  hi:  wud  kamit 
'd3Ast  Sa  'kraim  Sat  Sa  'dina'sensjualist^  iz  'gilti  ov;  bAt 
tu  in'd3oi  'waizli  iz  a  'maeksim  av  (h)wit/'nou  maen  ni:d  bi: 
a'/eimd.  bat  'if  ju:  'kaenot  'i:t  a  'dinar  av  'ha:bz  az  'wel  az 
a  'sto:ld  'oks,  'Sen  ju  ar  an  An'fo:t/anit  'maen;  jo:*  'Iav  fo 
'gud  'dinaz  haz  'pa:st  Sa  'houlsam  'baundari,  and  di'd3ena- 
reitid  inta  'gUtani^ 

*  Or  insps'reijnz.  *  Or  oar  Iz. 

>  Or  dinasenJuoUst.  *  Or  Jua. 

»  Or  gUtni  (see  Part  I,  §  199). 


82  PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 


6.    William  Wordsworth 

ai  'wondad  'lounli  8z  a  'klaud 
Cat  'flouts  on  'hai  oa^  'veilz  and  'hilz, 
(h)wen  'o:l  at  'wAns  ai  so:  a  'kraud, 
a  'houst  av  'gouldan  'dsofadilz; 
bi'said  Sa  'leik,  bi'ni.-e  Sa  'tri:z, 
'flAtrir)  and  'dainsir)  in  Sa  'bri;z. 

kan'tinjuas  az  Sa  'sta:z  Sat  'Jain 
and  'twirjkl  on  tSa  'milki  'wei, 
(5ei  'stretjt  in  'nevai-'endir)  'lain 
alor)  ?5a  'maid^in  av  a  'bei; 
'ten  '6auz(a)nd  'so:  ai  at  a  'fjla:ns, 
'to:sir)^  Sea  'hedz  in  'spraitli  'da:ns. 

Sa  'weivz  bi'said  Sam  'da:nst,  bat  'Sei 

'aut'did  Sa  'spa;:klir)  'weivz  in  'gli: ; 

9  'pouet^  'kud  not  bat  bi  'gci 

in  sAtJ  a  'd3okand  'kAmpani; 

ai  'geizd — and  'geizd — bat  'litl  '0o:t 

(h)wot  'welG  Sa  '/ou  ta  'mi:  had  'bro:L 

far  'o:ft*  (h)wen  on  mai  'kautj  ai  'lai 
in  'veikant  o:r  in  'pensiv  'mu:d, 
Cei  'flsej  apan  Soet  'inwad  'ai, 
(h)wit/  iz  Sa  'blis  av  'solitju:d; 
and  'Sen  mai  'halt  wiS  'plega  'filz, 
end  'da:nsiz  wiS  Sa  'dsefadilz. 

1  Or  0:9,  or  o:.  «  Or  tosiij  (see  Part  I,  §  146). 

»  Or  poult.  *  Or  dft  (see  Part  I,  §  146). 


II.    STANDAKD  PRONUNCIATION 

B.    RAPID  CONVERSATIONAL  STYLE 

7.    Charles  Dickens 
A  passage  from  the  Pickwick  Papers  (Chap.  7) 

(5a  'streindja,  'miinwaiU,  (h)ad  bi:n  'iitir),  'drir)kir),  an 
'toikirj,  wiS'aut  se'sei/n.  at  'evri  'gud  'strouk  (h)i:  iks'prest 
(h)iz  sjBtis'faek/n  and  a'pruiyl  av  Sa  'pleia(r)  in  a  moiist 
kondi'sendir)  an(d)  'paetranaizir)  'msena,  wit/  'kudnt  'feil  tu 
av  bi:n  'haili  'grsetifaiir)  ta  Sa  'pa,:ti  kan'sa:nd;  wail  at'evri 
'baed  a'tem(p)t  at  a  'ksetj,  and  'evri  'feilja  ta  'stop  t5a  'bo;l, 
hi;  'lo:n(t)/t  (h)iz  'pa:snl  dis'ple5a(r)  at  Sa  'hed  av  Sa 
di'voutid  indi'vidjual  in  'sAtJ  dinAnsi'ei/nz  sez  "'a:,  'a: ! — 
'stjuipid  " — "  'nau,  'bAtafirjgaz  " — "  'mAf  " — "  'hAmbAg " — an 
'sou  h:Q — idgsekju'leijnz  wit/  'si:md  tu  is'tsebli/  (h)im  in 
Si  epinjan  av  'oil  a'raund,  az  a  moust  'eksalant  and 
Andi'naiabl  'dgAdg  av  Sa  'houl  'a:t  an  'mistari  av  Sa  'noubl 
'geim  av  'krikit. 

"'kaepitl  'geim — 'wel  'pleid — ^'sAm  strouks '8edm(a)rabl," 
sed  Sa  streind3a,  az  'bouS  'saidz  'kraudid  inta  Sa  'tent,  at 
6a  kan'kluign  av  ?5a  'geim. 

"ju:  v  'pleid  it,  sa?"  inkwaiad  mista  'wo;dl,  hu:  ad 
bi:n  'mAt/  a'mju:zd  bai  hiz  la'kwsesiti. 

*  Or  ini:a'wail  (in  this  particular  case). 

6—2 


84  PHONETIC   TRANSCRIPTIONS 

"'pleid  it!  '0ir)k  ai  'haev — ^'6auzn(d)z  av  taimz — ^'not 
'hie — ^'west  'indiz — ik'saitir)  'Oir) — ^'hot  'we:k — ^'veri." 

"it  'mAs(t)  bi  rciiSar  a  'wo;m  pa'sjuit  in  'sAtJ  a 
'klaimitV'  aV^aivd  mista  'pikwik. 

"'wo:m — ^'red'hot — ^'skoifc/irj — 'glouir).  'pleid  8  'maet/ 
'wAns — 'sirjgl  'wikit — ^'frend  Sa  'kainl — sa  'tomas  'bleizou — 
'hu:  /(a)d  get  Sa  'greitist 'nAmbar  av'rAnz. — ^'wati  Sa  'to:s — 
'fa ;st  'inigz — 'sevn  a'klok  'ei  'em — 'siks  'neitivz  ta  luk  'aut 
— ^'went  'in ;  'kept  in — ^'hiit  in'tens — 'neitivz  'o:l  'feintid — 
'teikn  a'wei — 'frej  'ha:f'dAzn  'oidad  —  'feintid  'oilsou  — 
'bleizou  'boulig — sa'po.'tid  bai  'tu;  'neitivz — ^'kudnt  'boul 
mi:  'aut — ^'feintid  'tu: — ^'kliad  a'wei  Sa  'ka:nl — 'wudnt  giv 
'in — 'fei9fl  a'tendant — ^'kwaegkou  'saemba — ^'la:st  maen  'left 
— 'sAn  'sou  'hot,  'bset  in  'blistaz — 'bo:l  'sko:t/t  'braun — 
'faiv  hAndrad  n  'sevnti  'rAnz — 'rcL:Sar  ig'zo:stid — ^'kwagkou 
'mAstad  'Ap  'la:st  ri'meinir)  'streg6 — 'bould  mi:  'aut — ^'hsed 
a  'ba:0  n  'went  'aut  ta  'dina." 

"an(d)  'wot  bikeim  av  'wotsizneim,  sa,"  inkwaiad  an 
'oul(d)  'dgentlman. 

"'bleizou?" 

"'nou — Si  'ASa  dgentlman." 

"  'kwsegkou  'ssemba  ? " 

"'jes,  sa." 

"'pua  'kwaegkou — 'neva  ri'kAvad  it — 'bould  'on,  on 
'mai  akaunt — ^'bould  'o:f,  on  iz  'oun — 'daid,  sa."  'hia  Sa 
'streindga  'berid  (h)iz  'kauntinans  in  a  'braun  'djAg,  bat 
'weSa  ta  'haid  (h)iz  i'moujn  o:(r)  im'baib  its  kan'tents,  wi: 
'kaenot  dis'tirjktli  a'fa.m.  wi:  'ounli  'nou  Sat  (h)i:  'po:zd 
'sAdnli,  'dm:  a  'lor)  an  'di:p  'bre0,  an(d)  'lukt  '8eg(k)/asli  'on,  az 

^  This  sentence  might  well  be  read  more  slowly  than  the  rest  and  in 
declamatory  style,  thus  : — "  it  'xnAst  W:  rarSar  e  'wo:in  posjirt  in  'sAtJ 
'--   -     It." 


STANDARD  PRONUNCIATION.      STVLE   B  86 

'tu;  av  t59  'prinsapl  'membaz  av  Sa  'dirjli  'del  'klAb  e'prout/t 
mista  'pikwik,  an(d)  'sed — 

"  wiar  a'baut  ta  pa/teik  av  a  'plein  'dina(r)  at  (5a  'blu: 
'laian,  sa;  wi:  'houp  'ju;  an(d)  jo:  'frendz  (wi)l  'dgoin  as." 

"av  'ko:s,"  sed  mista  'woidl,  "a'aiAr)  aua  'frendz  wi; 
in'klu.-d  mista "  and  (h)i;  lukt  t(aywo:dz^  Sa  'streindga. 

"  'd3ir)gl/'  sed  Sset  'vaisatail  'djentlman,  'teikirj  Sa  'hint 
at  'wAns.  "  'dgirjgl — 'aelfrid  'd3ir)gl  iskwaia(r),  av  'nou  'ho;l, 
'nouwea." 

"  ai  /I  bi  'veri  'hsepi,  aim  'J^a,"  sed  mista  'pikwik. 

"'sou  Jl  'ai/'  sed  mistar  'selfrid  'dsirjgl,  'dro:ir)  'wAn 
'a:m  eru;  mista  'pikwiks,  and  a'nASa  Gru:  mista  'woidlz, 
aez  (h)i:  'wispad  konfi'den/ali  in  Si:  'iar  av  Sa  'fo;ma 
djentlman : — 

"'devlij  'gud  'dina — ^'kould,  bat  'kaepitl — ^'piipt  inta  Sa 
'T^um  Sis  'moinirj — ^TcLulz  (a)n  'paiz,  and  'o:l  'Sast  so;t  av 
8iT)— 'pleznt  'felouz  'Si:z — ^'wel  bi'heivd,  'tu: — ^'veri." 


8.    George  Eliot 

A  passage  from  the  Mill  on  the  Floss 
(Standard  Edition,  Vol.  I,  pp.  226,  227) 

'  "'ou,  'ai  'sei,  'maegi,"  sed  'tom  at  'la:st,  'liftir)  'Ap  Sa 
'stgend, "  wi:  mas(t)  'ki:p  'kwaiat  'hia,  ju:  nou.  if  wi:  'breik 
eniOir),  'misiz  'stelirj  1  'meik  as  'krai  pe'keivai." 

"'wot  s  'Saet?"  sed  'msegi. 

"  'ou,  it  s  Sa  'laetin  far  a  'gud  'skouldir),"  sed  'torn,  'not 
wiSaut  'sAm  'praid  in  (h)iz  'nolidj. 

"i3  Ji:  a  'kro;s  wuman?"   sed  'maegi. 

"'ai  b(i)'li:v  ju:!"   sed  'tom,  wiS  en  im'fotik  'nod. 
1  Or  'to:dx. 


86  PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 

.     .    ^ 

"ai  Qiv/k  'o:l  'wimin -^'kro:sa^  San  'men,"  sed  'msegi. 

"'amt  'gleg  z  a  'greit  di:l  'kro:sa^  San  'Arjkl  gleg,  an  'mASa 
'skouldz  mi;  'mo;  San  'fa:Sa  dAz." 

"'wel,  'ju:  Z  bi  a  'wuman  'sAm  dei,"  sed  'torn,  "sou  'ju: 
ni;dnt  to;k." 

"  bat  'ai  Jl  bi  a  'klevd  wuman,"  sed  'msegi,  wis  9  'to;s'. 

"  'ou,  ai  'dea'sei,  and  a  'naisti  kan'si;tid  '8ir).  'evribodi  1 
'heit  ju;." 

"bat  ju;  'o;tnt  ta  'heit  mi,  tom;  it  1  bi  'veri  'wikid 
ov  ju;,  far  ai  /I  'bi;  jo;  'sista." 

"'jes,  bat  'if  ju  ar  a  'na;sti  disa'griabl  '9ig,  ai  'faBl 
heit  ju;." 

"'ou  bat,  tom,  ju;  'wount!  ai  '/a;nt  bi  disagriabl.  ai 
Jl  bi  'veri  'gud  t(a)  ju; — and  ai  Jl  bi  gud  tu  'evribodi.  ju; 
'wount  heit  mi  'riali,  'wil  ju;,  tom?" 

"ou,  'boSa !  'neva  'maind!  'kAm,  its  'taim  fa  mi;  ta 
'la;n  mai  'lesnz.  'si:  'hia  !  wot  ai  v  got  ta  'du;,"  sed  'torn, 
'dro:ir)  'msegi't(a)wo:dz'  (h)im  an(d)'/ouir)  ha:(r)  iz  '0iarem, 
wail  Ji;  'pu/t  (h)a:  'hea  bihaind  (h)a;r  'iaz,  an(d)  pri'pead 
(h)a:self  ta  'pru;v  (h)a;  keipa'biliti  av  'helpir)  (h)im  in 
'juiklid.  /i;  bi'gsen  ta  'ri:d  wiS  'ful  'konfidaus  in  (h)a;r 
'oun  'pauaz,  bat  'prezntli,  bikAmir)  'kwait  bi'wildad,  ha: 
'feis  'flA/t  wis  iri'tei/n.  it  waz  'kwait  Ana'voidabl — fi: 
mas(t)  kan'fes  (h)a:r  in'kompitansi,  9n(d)  fi:  waz  'not  'fond 
av  hju:mili'ei/n.  ^^^^ 

"  it  s  'nonsns  ! "  Ji  s^d^-"  an(d)  'veri  'Agli  'stAf— -'noubadi 
ni;d  'wont  ta  meik  it  'CLut." 

"'a:,  'Sea  nciu,  mis  'maegi!"  sed  'tom,  'droig  Sa  'buk 
a'wei,  an(d)  'waegig  (h)iz  'hed  set  (h)a;, "  ju:  'si;  ju  d  'not  sou 
'klevar  az  ju;  'do:t  ju:  wa:."  ^ 

1  Or  'kroBo.  »  Or  'toa.  »  Or  'to:dx. 


STANDARD   PRONUNCIATION.      STYLE   B 


87 


"  'ou,"  sed  'maifji,  'pautir),  "  ai  'dea'sei  ai  kad  'meik  it 
'aiit,  if  ai  d  'la;nt  wot  'gouz  bi'fo:,  az  'ju;  haBv." 

"bat  '5aet  s  wot  ju:  'djAst  'kudnt,  mis  'wizdam,"  sed 
'torn.  "f(a)r  its  'o:l  (5a  'ha:da  wen  ju:  'nou  wot  'gouz 
bi'fo:;  fa  'Sen  ju:  v  got  ta  'sei  'wot  defi'ni/n  '0ri:  iz,.an(d) 
'wot  'aeksiom  'faiv  iz.  bat  'get  a'loT)  wi5  ju  'nau ;  ai  mas(t) 
'gou  'on  wis  'Sis.  'hiaz  Sa  'laetin  'grsema.  'si:  wot  ju:  kan 
'meik  av  'Soet.'* 

9.    E.  F.  Benson 

A  passage  from  Dodo  (Chap.  4)* 

With  intonation  curves* 

P  V 


at'Sis'moumant  |  a'/ril'vois'ko:ld'doudouframtJa'droir)rum.  || 

/  p 


'doudou'doudou  "  it'kraid. 


Sa'm3en'bro:tmi'tu:'tepid'pout/t'egz 


1  Reproduced  by  kind  permission  of  Mr  Benson  and  the  publishers, 
Messrs  Methuen. 

^  See  Part  I,  pp.  59 — 64.  p,  /,  etc.  are  here  used  with  their  usual 
musical  values  to  indicate  the  average  loudness  of  the  groups.  For  U 
and  I  see  Part  I,  §  214. 


88 


PHONETIC  TRANSCEIPTIONS 


/ 


'<iu;senmisAm0ir)'els.    jl    'izt5(e)8SAt/96ir)aza'grild'boun  ? "  1| 
P P ^ 

'5i:zn'ma:kswa'spi:dilifoloud'Ap  |  baiSia'piaransav'mis'steinz  | 
p  p  p 


9t{59'dainir)rum'do:.  ||  in'wAn'haend  J  /i'heldtJadis'paizd'egz,  || 
P  P 


int5i'ASa    |    a'kwaiarav'mju:zikpeip9.  || 


P 


bi'haind(h)9:folouda'futman    |  '  wi5(h)a;'brekfas(t)trei, 
P  p 


iniks'kjuizabl'ignarans    |    ozta'wotw8zri'kwaiadov(h)im 


STANDARD  PRONUNCIATION.      STYLE   B  89 

mf  p 


'*'diadoudou'7iwent'on,  | 


mf 


"ju/nouweuaimk9m'pouzir)a'sinifani 


Vif 


/v 


ai'woiitsAmeir)'mo:rik'saitir)t59nau:'pout/t'egz. 
mf 


'roista'brokstnai'noul'teikmai'said.  || 
nf  rnf 


ju:'kudnt'i;t'pout/t'egzata'bo:l   |    — 'kudju:  ?  [( 
mf  w/ 


^imaiVdu:veri'welfara'fju:nrdl'raa;tJ    |    o:r3nok'ta;n, 


90  PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 

mf  mf 


batSei'woruntdu.'fera'simfani,  |  is'pe/lifeSa'skeatsou. 

/ 


o'br3endion'soude9nda'gril(i'boun 


/ 


(i)zwotwAii'nali'woiitsfer9'ske9tsou, 
mf 


ounli'58etedbi'k\vaitautav?id'kwestJ(^9)n." 


'i:did'steinzto;ktina'lauddi'te:mind'vois, 
/  V 


ond'emfasaiz(^(h)a:'points    |    wi5litl'dfE/izn'flAri/iz 


STANDARD   PRONUNCIATION.      STYLE   B  91 


dvSa'di/ev'pout/t'egz.  ||  at'Sis'moumaDt  j 
mf  mf 


^wAnavSem'flu.-ontetJa'flo:    |    endiks'ploudid 


b9titson'il'wind(58tblouz'noub8dienigud, 


P 


ondot'enireit'disri'liivdSo'futmenfromiz'steitavindi'sisn 


hizi'mKdjet'mi/nwaz'klialitari'muivit.  || 
mf  mf 


'doudou'tiru:(h)9:self'J3aekin(h)a;'t/6d    |    wiea'pirlav'laifta-  |l 


PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 


'gou'on'gou'oD'7»'kraid.    |    "jud'tui'splendid.  || 

/ 


'tebswotjuraitSe'prestouon."  |[ 


ai'ka:nt'wei8te'nA5d'moumdnt"sed'i:di6 


"  aimin5a'mJdl8v5amoustin'tra:nsir)mou'ti;f,  | 
mf 


wi  t/iz'wa  ikirj'au  t'bj  u :  taflL 


'dju;'mainmai'smoukir)in5a'droir)rum  ?    {{ 


STANDARD  PRONUNCIATION.      STYLE  B  93 

P  P 


aim'o:fli'sori,  |  betitmeiks'oilSa'difranstamai'waik. 


^/ 


mf 


'beinalitl'insensSear'aiftewddz.  ||  'dursenmie'boun'doudou.*  || 
mf 


'kAmand'hiamipleiSa'sksotsouleitai-'on. 
m/  /         / 


7T 


itsSa'best'wirjaiv'eva'dAn,    ||   'ou,  |  'baiSa'wei,  | 


ai'teli(jra:fttahee'trAf(e)nta'kArat9'morou- 


'hiizmaikon'dAktaju'nou.  ||  juikan'putim'ApinSa'vilidj  | 


94  PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 

w/  .    mf 


o;5a'koulhouliijuiaik.  ||  hiiz'kwait'hsepi 
mf  mf 


if(h)i:'getsi'nAf'bia.  ||  hiizmai'd^aimankan'dAktaju'nou.  || 
mf  mf 


ai'meid'himin'taiali.  ||  ai'tuk(h)imta58prin'ses6iA?J8'dei 
mf  mf 


wenaiwazat'eiks,  |  ondwi'oilhsed'biatageSa  | 
mf  mf 


inSava'rsendaavSa'bou'siit.  ||  ju;lbia'mju;zdwi3(h)im. 
mf  p  mf 


'ou'rcL;Sa"sed'doudou ;  |  " 'Saetlbi'oil'rait.  || 


STANDARD   PRONUNCIATION.      STYLE   B  95 

i       mf  rnf 


hi:kii'sli:pinSe'haus.  ||  'wil(h)i:kAm'8:litamorou  ?  || 


/       / 


\  /A 


'lets'si: 


ta'morouz'SAndi. 
mf 


'iidiG,   I    aiv'gotnai'dia. 


wiilhseva'dielitl'saivisinSa'haus — 


m/ 


wi/kdintgouta't/ait/ifit'snouz—  \\  9nd'ju;/l'pleijo:'maes, 
mf 


and'hea'wotsizneim/lkan'dAkt,  | 
mf  mf 


3n(d)'b9:tian'gra:nti8n(dyju:9n(dyailsiT).  ||  'wountitbi'lAvli  ?  || 


\ 


96 


,7*/ 


PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 
mf 


"ju:en(dyaijsetj'o:l'5aet5isa;ft8'nu:n.  ||  'teligraiftd'trAfla  | 


3:wot'evariz'neim'iz.  |   takAinbaiSi'eit'twenti.  || 
mf 


een(h)i:lbi'hiabai'twelv,  | 


nf 


3nid)wi:lh8evSa'sa;visata'kwo:t8'pa:st." 
/  IP  mf 


"doudouSaetlbi'grsend"sed'i:dit*.  ||  "  ai'kaint'weit'nau. 
mf  mf 


gu(d)'bai.  ||  'hAri'Apmai'brekfost —  | 


STANDARD   PRONUNCIATION.      STYLE   B  97 


aim'o;fli'/a:p'set."        'iidie'went'baektatJa'droirjrum, 


'wislirjinopa'tikjelali'/ril'maena. 


III.    STANDARD   PRONUNCIA.TION 
C.    DECLAMATORY  STYLE 

10.    Lord  Byron 

A  passage  from  Childe  Harold 
(Canto  IV,  stanzas  177 — 179) 

'on  !  C&t  t58  'dezat  wa:  mai  'dvvelirjpleis, 
wis  'wAn  'fea  'spirit  fo  mai  'minista, 
6aet  ai  mait  'o:l  fo'get  Sa  'hju:man  'reis, 
send,  'heitir)  'nou  wAn,  'Iav  bAt  'ounli  'ha:! 
ji:  'eliments ! — in  hu:z  m'noublir)  'sta:(r) 
ai  'fill  maiself  ig'zo:ltid — ^'kaen  ji;  not 
ae'koid  mi;  'sAtJ  a  'biiirj  ?  du:  ai  'a:(r) 
in  'di;mir)  'sAtJ  in'hsebit  'meni  a  'spot? 
6ou  'wii5  Sem  tu  k5n'va:s  ksen  'reali  bi;  aoa*  'lot. 

6ear  iz  a  'ple3a(r)  in  Sa  'pa:6lis  'wudz, 
tJear  iz  a  'r8ept/Jua(r)  on  Sa  'lounli  'Jo: (a), 
Sear  iz  so'saieti  hwea  'nAn  in'tru;dz, 
bai  Sa  'di;p  'si;,  aend  'mjii;zik  in  its  'ro;(a); 
ai  'Iav  not  'maen  Sa  'les,  bAt  'neit/Jua  'mo:(a), 
from  'Si:z  aoar  'intavju;z,  in  'hwit/  ai  'sti;l 
from  'o;l  ai  'mei  'bi;,  o;  'haev  'bi;n  bi'fo;(a), 
tu  'mirjcjl  wiS  6a  'ju:niva;s,  aend  'fi:l 
'hwot  ai  kttn  'near  iks'pres,  jet  'kaenot  'o;l  kon'siil. 
1  For  ao9  see  Part  I,  §  138. 


STANDARD  PRONUNCIATION.      STYLE   C  99 

'roul  'on,  Sail  'di;p  afend  *'daik  'blu:  'ou/an — 'roul ! 
'ten  'Gauzand  'flirts  'swiip  ouva  Si:  in  'vein; 
'msen  'ma:ks  Si;  'a:9  wiS  'ru;in — hiz  kon'troul 
'stops  wis  Sa  '/o:(a); — Apon  Sa  'wo:t(a)ri  'plein 
Sa  'reks  a;r  'o:l  'Sai  'di:d,  'no:  dA0  ri'mein 
a  'Jaedou  ov  'msenz  'rsBvidg,  'seiv  hiz  'oun, 
'hvven,  for  a  'moument,  laik  a  'drop  ov  'rein, 
hi:  'sifjks  intu  Sai  'dep9s  wiS  'bAblir)  'cjroiin, 
wiS'aut  d  'cjreiv,  'An'neld,  'An'kofind,  aend  'An'noun. 


11.    W.  E.  Gladstone 

Peroration  of  Mr  Gladstone's  speech  on  the  second 
reading  of  the  Reform  Bill  of  1866^ 

'mei  ai  'sei  tu  'onorabl  'd3entlmen  'opozit,  sez  'sAm  ov 
Sem  haev  a'drest  a'dvais  tu  djentlmen  on  'Sis  'said  ov  Sa 
'haus,  "'wil  ju:  not  kon'sida  bi'fo:(a)  ju:  im'baik  in  Sis 
'nju:  krui'seid,  'hweSa  Sa  ri'zAlts  ov  Si:  'ASaz  in  hwitj  ju: 
hffiv  in'geid3d  haev  bi:n  sou  saetis'fsektori  ? "  'greit  'baetlz 
ju:  haev  'fo:t,  aend  'fo;t  Sem  'maenfuli.  Sa  'baetl  ov  mein- 
'teinirj  'sivil  disa'bilitiz  on  akaunt  ov  ri'lid3as  bi'li:f,  Sa 
baetl  ov  ri'zistir)  Sa  'fa:st  ri'foim  aekt,  Sa  baetl  ov  pro'tek/an, 
'oil  'Siiz  'greit  'baetlz  haev  bi:n  'fo:t  bai  Sa  'greit  'pa:ti  Saet 
ai  'si:  'opozit ;  aend  aez  tu  'sAm  ov  Sem  ai  a'dmit  mai  'oun 
'/ea(r)  ov  Sa  risponsi'biliti.  bAt  'haev  Sea  ri'zAlts  bi:n  'sAtJ 
oez  Saet  ju:  Jud  bi:  dis'pouzd  tu  ri'nju:  Si:z  a'taeks  a'gein? 
'sa:tenli  'Souz  hu:  'sit  on  'Sis  said  haev  'nou  'ri:zan  o:  'taitl 
tu  'faind  'forltl     Si:  i'fekt  ov  jua^  'ko:(a)s  haez  bi:n  tu  'giv 

1  The  pronunciation  actually  used  by  Mr  Gladstone  differed  in  many 
respects  from  that  given  here.  It  was  rather  similar  to  that  given  in 
no.  20. 

2  Or  '«»lt.  »  Or  jo:(9). 

7—2 


100  PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 

6em  fb  'faiv  aut  ov  'siks,  o;  fo  'siks  CLut  ov  'sevan  'jiaz^  (58 
'kondakt  send  'msenid3ment  ov  'pAblik  e'feaz.  Si:  ifekt 
haez  bi:n  tu  'loua,  tu  ri'djuis,  send  kon'traekt  jua^  'd3Ast 
'influens  in  Sa  'kAntri,  fend  tu  8'brid3  jua^  '/ea(r)  in  Si: 
sedgainis'treifan  ov  Sa  'gAvanment.  it  iz  'gud  fo  Sa  'pAblik 
'intrist^  Saet  ju:  Jud  bi*  'stror);  bAt  'if  ju:  a:  tu  bi*  'stror), 
ju:  kaen  'ounli  'bi:  sou  bai  'Jouir),  aez  'wel  aez  Sa  'kaindnis 
aend  Sa  'pa:sanal  dgenfrositi  hwit/  ai  sem  'Jua  ju:  'fi:l 
to:(a)dz"  Sa  'piipl,  a  'pAblik  'trAst  aend  'konfidens  'in  Sem. 
'hwot  ai  'sei  'nau  k&n  'ha:dli  bi:  'sed  wiG  sbn  'iivil  'raoutiv. 
'bAt,  sa:,  wi:  a:r  a'seild ;  'Sis  'bil  iz  in  a  steit  ov  'kraisis 
gend  ov  'peril,  send  6a  'gAvanment  a'lor)  'wiS  it.  wi:  'staend 
o:  'foil  wis  it  aez  haez  bi:n  di'klead  bai  mai  'noubl  'frend. 
wi:  'staend  wis  it  'nau ;  wi:  'mei  'fo:l  wiS  it  a  'Jo:t  'taim 
'hens,  aend  'if  wi:  'du:,  wi:  Jael  'raiz  wiS  it  hiai"'a:fta.  ai 
Jael  'not  a'tempt  tu  'me39  wiS  pri'si3an  Sa  'foisiz  Saet  a:  tu 
bi:  a'reid  in  Sa  'kAmir)  'strAgl.  pa'hacps  Sa  'greit  di'vi3an 
ov  tu'nait  iz  'not  Sa  'la;st  Saet  mAst  'teik  'pleis  in  Sa  'strAgl. 
ju:  mei  'posibli  sak'si:d  aet  'sAm  'point  ov  Sa  'kontest.  ju: 
mei  'draiv  as  from  CLoa  'si:ts.  ju:  mei  'beri  Sa  'bil  Saet  wi: 
haev  intro'dju:st,  bAt  for  its  'epita:f  wi:  wil  'rait  apon  its 
'greivstoun  'Sis  'lain,  wiS  'sa:ten  'konfidens  in  its  fulfil- 
ment : — 

"  ekso:ri'eari  'aelikwis  'nostris  'eks  'osibas  'Alto:'." 
ju:  'kaenot  'fait  ageinst  Sa  'fju:t/Jua.    'taim  iz  on  'aoa  'said. 
Sa  'greit  'sou/al  'foisiz  hwitj  'mu:v  'on  in  Ssa  'mait  send 

1  Or  jo:z.  2  Or  jo:{0).  '  Or  'interest. 

4  Or  bi:.  "  Or  tu'wo-dz. 

6  In  the  modern  reformed  pronunciation  of  Latin  this  line  would  be  :— 
eksori'aore  'alikwls  'no8tri:s  'eks  'osilmB  'ultoar. 
Some  might  stress  the  wqrds  more  rhythmically  thus  :— 

'ek83rl'aar(e)  ali'kwis  notftriia  eks  'osibus  'ultoir. 


STANDARD  PRONUNCIATION.      STYLE   C  101 

'm8ed3isti,  send  hwit/  69  'tju:mAlt  ov  'aoa  di'beits  dAz  not 
for  a  'moument  im'piid  0;  dis'ta:b — 'Souz  'greit  'sou/al 
'foisiz  a;r  o'geinst  ju:;  Sei  a;  'maijald  on  'aoa  'said,  aend 
Sa  'baena  hwit/  wi:  'nau  'kaeri,  Sou  po'hgeps  at  'sAm 
'moument  it  mei  'dru:p  ouvar  aoo  'sirjkirj  'hedz,  jet  it 
'sum  9'gein  wil  'flout  in  5i:  'ai  ov  'hevon,  aend  it  wil  bi: 
'bo:n  bai  6a  'farm  'haendz  ov  Sa  ju:'naitid  'pi:pl  ov  Sa  '0ri: 
'kirjdamz,  pa'haeps  'not  tu  an  'iizi,  bAt  tu  a  'saiten  aend  tu 
a  'not  'distant  'viktori. 


12.    John  Keats 

Sonnet  to  Sleep 

'ou  'so:fb^  im'ba:ma(r)  ov  Sa  'stil  'mid'nait, 

'/Atir)  wif5  'keaful  'firjgaz  aend  bi'nain, 
aoa  'glu:mpli:zd  'aiz,  im'bauad  from  5a  'lait, 

in'/eidid  in  fo'getfulnis  di'vain; 
'ou  '8u:Sist  'sliip!  if  'sou  it  'pli:z  6i:,  'klouz, 

in  'midst  ov  'Sis  Sain  'him,  mai  'wiliij  'aiz, 
o:  'weit  Si:  'ei'men,  'ea  Sai  'popi  'Orouz 

a'raund  mai  'bed  its  'IaHt)  't/seritiz; 

'Sen  'seiv  mi:,  o:  Sa  'pa:sid  'dei  wil  'Jain 
apon  mai  'pilou,  'bri:dir)  'meni  'wouz, — 

'seiv  mi:  from  'kjuarias  'kon  fans.  Saet  'stil  'lo:dz 
its  'strer)9  fo  'da:knis,  'bAiouig  laik  a  'moul; 

'ta:n  Sa  'ki:  'deftli  in  Si:  'oilid  'wo:dz, 
aend  'si:l  Sa  'hA/id  'ka:skit  ov  mai  'soul. 

1  Or  '■oft. 


102,  phonetic  transcriptions 

13.    John  Milton 

At  a  Solemn  Music 

'blest  'pear  ov  'saearmz^  'pledsiz  ov  'hevnz  'dsoi, 
'sfiaboin  ha/mounias  'sistaz,  'vols  aend  'va:s, 
'wed  jua'^  di'vain  'saundz,  aend  'mikst  'paoar^  im'ploi, 
'ded  eirjz  wiS  'inbriitSd  'sens  'eibl  tu  'pias; 

5     aend  tu  aoa  'haireizd  'faentasi  pri'zent 
Saet  'Andis'taibid  'sor)  ov  'pjua  kon'sent, 
'ei  'sATj  bifo:(a)  Sa  'ssefaeakAlad  'Oroun 
tu  'him  Saet  'sits  Sear'on, 
wi(5  'seintli  '/aut  send  'solam  'dguibilii; 

lo    'hwea  6a  'brait  'serafim  in  'bainirj  'rou 
6ea  'laud  Ap'liftid  'eindgel'trAmpits  'blou, 
aend  5a  t/e'ru:bik  'houst  in  '0auzand  'kwaeaz 
'tAt/  6ear  i'mo;t(a)l  'ha;ps  ov  'goulden  'waeez, 
wis  '6ouz  'dsAst  'spirits  6aet  'wea  vik'to:rjas  'paimz, 

15    'himz  di'vaut  aend  'houli  'saimz 
'sirjir)  eva'laistirjli ; 

Caet  'wi:  on  'aiQ,  wiS  'Andis'koidirj  'vois, 
mei  'raitli  'ainsa  Saet  mi'loudjas  'noiz; 
aez  'wAns  wi:  'did,  til  'dispro'po:/and  'sin 

20    'd3a;d  ageinst  'neit/^uaz  't/aim,  send  wis  'ha;/  'din 
'brouk  Sa  fea  'mju:zik  Saet  'o:l  'kri;t/^uaz  'meid 
tu  'Sea  'greit  'lo:d,  hu;z  'Iav  Sea  'mou/an  'sweid 
in  'pa:fikt  daia'peisan,  'hwailst  Sei  'stud 
in  'fa:st  o'biidjens,  aend  Sea  'steit  ov  'gud. 

25    'ou,  mei  wi:  'su:n  agein  ri'nju:  Saet  'sot), 
aend  'ki:p  in  'tju:n  wiS  'hevn,  til  'god  ea  'lor) 
tu  hiz  si'lestjal  'konso:t  as  ju:'nait, 
tu  'liv  wis  'him,  aend  'sir)  in  'endlis  'mo:n  ov  'lait! 
1  For  ac»,  ao«  see  Part  I,  §§  127,  138.  ^  Or  jo:(»). 


standard  pronunciation.    style  c  103 

14.    William  Shakespeare 
A  passage  from  Julius  Caesar,  Act  ill,  Scene  2 

(A  phonetic  transcription  of  the  original  16th  century  pronuncia- 
tion of  this  passage  will  be  found  in  Vietor,  Skakespear^s 
Pronunciation,  Vol.  ii,  p.  131.) 

'SBntoni,     'frendz,  'roumanz,  'kAntrimen,  'lend  mi; 
juar^  'iaz; 
ai  'kAm  tu  'beri  'siiza*,  'not  tu  'preiz  him. 
5i:  'iivil  Cast  'men  'du;  'livz  'aifba  Sem; 
6a  'gud  iz  'o:ft^  in'tairid  wis  Sea  'bounz; 
'sou  let  it  bi:  wis  'si:za.    Sa  'noubl  'bruitas 
ha;9  'tould  ju:  'si;za  woz  sem'bi/as*; 
'if  it  'wa:^  sou,  it  woz  a  'griivas  'foilt^, 
aend  'griivasli  hse9  'siiza  'ainsad  it. 
'hia,  Anda  'li:v  ov  'bruitas  aend  Sa  'rest — 
fo  'bruitas  iz  aen  'onorabl  maen; 
'sou  ai  Sei  'oil;  'oil  'onorabl  men — 
'kAm  'ai  tu  'spiik  in  'siizaz'^  'fjumaral. 
'hi:  woz  mai  'frend,  'feiOful  send  'djAst  tu  'mi:; 
bAt  'bruitas  'sez  hi:  woz  sem'bi/as*; 
aend  'bru:tas  iz  aen  'onorabl  maen, 
hi:  haeO  'bro:t  'meni  'kseptivz  'houm  tu  'roum, 
hu:z  'raensamz  did  Sa  'dsenaral  'kofaz  'fil; 

1  Or  jo:(a)r. 

2  Some  might  use  the  vowel  a  (Part  I,  §  176)  instead  of  a  in  the  word 
Caesar(^s) :  thiis,  '8i:zu,(z). 

3  Or  'oft. 

^  The  pronunciation  sem'bijios  is  occasionally  heard  in  this  particular 
case,  the  second  i  being  introduced  for  the  sake  of  the  metre;  such  a 
pronunciation  is  however  not  necessary. 

»  Or  'wE».  «  Or  'folt. 


104  PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 

did  '5is  in  'si.'za  si:m  aem'bi/as^  ? 

'hwen  Sset  S9  'pua  haev  'kraid,  'si.'za  hae0  'wept; 

sem'bi/an  /ud  bi'  meid  ov  'stama  'stAf; 

jet  'bru:tas  'sez  hi:  woz  aem'bi/as^; 

aend  'bruitas  iz  aen  'onorabl  maen. 

ju;  'oil  did  'si:  6aet  on  5a  'l(j)u:pakael 

ai  '6rais  pri'zentid  him  a  'kirjli  'kraun, 

hwitj  'hi:  did  '0rais  ri'fjuiz.     'woz  'Sis  aem'bi/an? 

jet  'bru:tas  'sez  hi:  woz  aem'bi/as*; 

aend,  'Jua,  hi:  iz  aen  'onorabl  maen. 

ai  'spi:k  'not  tu  'dis'pru:v  hwot  'bru:tas  'spouk, 

bAt  'hiar  ai  'sem,  tu  'spi:k  'hwot  ai  du:  'nou. 

ju:  'o:l  did  'Iav  him  'wAns,  'not  wiSaut  'ko:z; 

'hwot  'ko:z  wi6'houldz^  ju:  Sen,  tu  'mo:(a)n  fo  him  ? 

'ou  'dgAdgment!  Sau  (i:t  'fled  tu  'bruiti/  'bi:sts, 

aend  'men  haev  'lo:st*  Sea  'ri;zan.     'bea  wis  mi: ; 

mai  'ha:t  iz  in  Sa  'kofin  'Sea  wiS  'siiza, 

Bend  ai  mAst  'po:z,  til  it  'kAm  'baek  tu  mi:. 

1  See  note  4  on  previous  page.  2  Or  bl:. 

»  Or  wlS'botildz.  *  Or  'lost. 

15.    Alfred  Lord  Tennyson 

Lyrics  from  The  Princess 
With  intonation  curves* 

/ 


Sa'8plendo'fo:lzon'ka:8l'wo:lz  | 

^  See  Part  I,  pp.  59 — 64.  p,  /,  etc.  are  here  used  with  their  usual 
musical  values  to  indicate  the  average  loudness  of  the  groups.  For  II 
and  1  see  Part  I,  §  214. 


STANDARD  PRONUNCIATION.     STYLE  0  105 


/ 


aend'snoui'SAmita    I    'ouldin'storri ; 


/ 


Sa'lorj'lait'/eiksakroisSd'leiks,  || 


aBnd59'waild'k3et8r8ekt'li;psin'glo.Ti 

/    /       s       s 


^-  "\ 


'blou  I  'bjuigl,   II  'blou,  ||  'settJe'waild'ekouz'flaiir),  || 
/  mf         mp  mp        p  pp 


r^ 


'blou  I  'bju:gl,  ||  'a;ns9>  j  'ekouz,  1|  'daiir)  |  'daiir)  |  'daiiTj,  |[ 
p  p  p 


'ou'haik  f  'ou'hia!  ||  hau'Oinsend'klia  || 

1  If  no  break  is  made  between  this  group  and  tbe  next,  r  should  be 
inserted,  thus:  'ainsor'ekouz. 


L06  PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 

V  P  P 


send'eina    |    'kliara    |   'faiCa'gouirj  I  || 
P  P 


'ou'swiitaend'fa;  |  from'klifaend'ska;  li 
P  P 


Sa'homzov'elflaend  |  'feintli'blouirj !  1| 
mf  p 


"^ 


'blou    II    letAs'hiatJa'pa.-pl'glenzri'plailr) :  || 
mp        p  p  PP  P  P  PP 


^\ 


'blou  I  'bjuigl  (1  'a:nsa»  |  'ekouz  ||  'daiir)  |  'daiii)  |  'daiiT).  || 
mp  mp 


'ou'Iav  I  Cei'daiin'jon'rit/'skai  || 
>  See  note  on  previous  page. 


STANDARD  PRONUNCIATION.      STYLE   C  107 

P  P  P 


tJei'feinton'hil  |  o:'fi:ld  |  o/riva  |1 


mf 


aodr'ekouz'roulfraiu'soultu'soul  [ 


/ 


/ 


aend'groufor'eva*  |  aendfoi^eva  |I 


/       /     / 


A 


^ 


'blou  I 'bju;gl  ||  'blou   ||  'setSd'waild'ekouz'flaiirj   || 


mp 


mp  p  P  PP 


send'a:ns3^  |  'ekouz  ||  'a;iisa  ||  'daiir)  |  'daiir)  |  'daiiij.  [| 
>  See  note  od  p.  105. 


IV.    PRONUNCIATION   OF  PARTICULAR 
SPEAKERS 

16.    Joseph  Addison 

A  passage  from  Sir  Roger  de  Goverley's  country  residence 
and  friends 

Pronunciation  of  Q.  Noel- Arm  field,  Esq.  (London) » 

ai  hav  ab'zaivd  in  'sevrl  9v  mai  'peipaz,  Sat  mai  'frond 

^     sa  'rodja,  amidst  'o:l  hiz  'gud  'kwolitiz  iz  'sAm9ir)  av  a 

/    'hjumarist,  an  Sat  hiz  'vaitjuz  az  'wel  az  impa'fek/nz,  ar  az 

2   it  wa:  'tind3d  bai  a  'sa:tn  eks'trsevagans,  hwit/  'meiks  Sam 

pa'tikjulali  'hiz,  an  dis'tirjgwi/iz  Sam  from  'Souz  av  'ASa 

/    'men.    'Sis  'ka:st  av  'maind,  az  it  iz  'djenrali  'veri  'inoesnt 

^  in  it'self,  'sou  it  'rendaz  hiz  konva'sei/n  'haili  9'gri:abl,  an 

'mora  di'laitfl  San  Sa  'seim  di'gri;  av  'sens  an  'va:tju  wud 

a'pia  in  Sea  'koman  and  'oidnri  'kAlaz.    az  ai  waz  'woikirj 

wi9  him  'laist  'nait,  hij  'askt  mi  'hau  ai  'laikt  Sa  'gud 

'msen,  hu;ra  ai  av  'dsAst  'nau  'men/nd :  an  wiS'aut  'steir) 

;  fa  mai  'a;nsa,  'tould  mi  Sat  hi  waz  a'freid  av  biiT)  in'sAltid 

wis  'laetin  an  'griik  at  hiz  'oun  'teibl:  fa  'hwitj  'ri;zn  hi 

/  di'zaiad  a  pa'tikjala  'frend  av  hiz  at  Si  juni'vaisiti  ta  'faind 

1  See  notes  on  pp.  109,  110. 


PRONUNCIATION  OF  PARTICULAR  SPEAKERS         109 

im  'aut  9  'klo:d5iman  'raiSar  ev  'plein  'sens  5n  'mAt/  'leinir),     $ 
9v  9  'gud  'aespekt,  a  'klia  'vois,  a  'sou/abl  'tempa,  'send,  'if 
'posibl,  9  'maen  t59t  Anda'stud  9  'litl  9v  bcek'gaemn.     "  mai 
'frend,"  sez  sa  'rod3a,  "'faund  mi  'aut  'Sis  dgentlmn,  'hu, 
bi'saidz  Si  en'dauman+^^s  ri'kwaiad  9v  him  'iz,  Sei  'tel  mi,  a 
'gud  'tikolg,  So  i  'dAznt  'Jou  it.    ai  hgv  'givn  im  S9  'pa:snid3    / 
av  Sa  'pserij;  an  bikoiz  ai  'nou  hiz  'vaelju,  haev  'setld  Apon    I 
him  a  'gud  a'njuiti  fa  'laif.    'if  hij  aut'livz  mi,  hi  f\  'faind 
Sot  hi  waz  'haiar  in  mai  es'tiim  San  pa'hseps  hi  'Oirjks  hij  1 
iz.    hi  az  'nau  'bi:n  wiS  mi  '9a;ti  'jaiz  and  Sou  i  'dAznt  'nou  J 
ai  hav  teikn  'noutis  av  it,  haz  'nevar  in  'o;l  'Saet  'taim    / 
'a:skt  'eni0ir)  av  mi  fr  im'self.  So  ij  iz  'evri  'dei  sa'lisitir)  mi 
fo  'sAm9ir)  in  bi'ha:f  av  'wau  ar  'ASar  av  mai  'tenants,  'hiz   / 
po'ri/naz.     Sar  az  'not  bim  a  'b;sju;t  in  Sa  'paerij  sins  hi  az  3 
'livd  am  AT)  Sam;  if  'eni  dis'pjuit  a'raiziz,  Sei  a'plai  Sam-    / 
selvz  ta  'him  fa  Sa  di'si3n :  if  Sei  du  'not  sekwij'es  in  hiz 
'd3Ad3mant,  hwitj  ai  Girjk  'neva  'hsepnd  abAv  'wAns  a  'twais 
at  'moust,  Sei  a'pid  ta  'mi:j.     at  hiz  'fa:st  'setlirj  wis  mi,  0~^  1 
ai  'meid  im  a  'preznt  av  'o:l  Sa  'gud  'sa;mnz  hwitJ  av  bim    3 
'printid  in  'irjfjlij,  and  'ounli  'bcgd  av  him,  Sat  'evri  'sAnde 
hi  wud  pra'nauns  'wau  av  Sam  in  Sa  'pulpit.     a'ko;dir)li  hi     ^ 
az  di'd3estid  Sam  intu  'sAtJ  a  'siariz,  Sat  Se  'folo  wau  a'uASa 
'nset/rli,  an  'meik  a  kan'tinj u:d  'sistim  av  'prsektikl  di'viniti."     / 

Notes  on  the  pronunciation  of  0.  Noel-Armjield,  Esq. 

Mr  Noel-Armfield's  father  spoke  Southern  English,  his 
mother  came  from  Yorkshire  but  acquired  the  Southern 
English  pronunciation.  Mr  Noel-Armfield  spent  many 
years  of  his  youth  in  Yorkshire,  but  this  did  not  greatly 
affect  his  pronunciation.  He  studied  at  London  Univer- 
sity and  at  the  University  of  Lille. 


110 


PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 


The  following  are  the  chief  points  in  which  his  pro- 
nunciation differs  from  StP  as  defined  in  Part  I,  §§  1,  2. 

(1)  e  is  used  in  the  first  syllable  of  extravagance, 
endowments  and  the  second  syllable  of  Sunday. 

(2)  i:  is  used  in  agreeable. 

(3)  G  is  used  in  tuith  when  followed  by  a  breathed 
consonant. 

(4)  OB  (=  e  with  lip-rounding  added)  is  used  in  the 
second  syllable  of  innocent. 

Note  also  that 

(5)  u  is  used  in  the  third  syllable  of  particularly 
but  9  in  particular. 

(6)  I,  the  vowel  intermediate  between  i  and  e,  is 
used  in  the  terminations  -ed,  -es,  -age  etc. 

Mr  Noel-Armfield  has  also  kindly  given  me  the  follow- 
ing particulars  regarding  his  pronunciation  which  do  not 
appear  from  the  phonetic  text. 

(7)  r  after  p,  b,  f,  v,  9,  8  is  rolled,  not  fricative. 

(8)  The  o:  in  bikoiz  is  intermediate  between  the 
usual  o:  and  o. 

(9)  a:  varies  slightly  in  quality  according  as  it 
represents  ir  in  the  spelling  or  not.  In  the  former  case 
it  tends  towards  a  lengthened  a  (which  may  be  written 
a:).  Thus  httrt  (halt)  is  distinct  from  shir^t  (/ait,  tending 
towards  /Ait). 


PHONUNCIATION  OF  PARTICULAR  SPEAKERS         111 


17.    Fuhrken-Jespersen-Rodhe 

Anecdote  taken  from  Fuhrken's  Transcription  of 
Jespersen  and  Rodhe's  EngeUk  Ldsebok^ 

Pronunciation  of  Q.  E.  Fuhrken,  Esq.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.  (London)  2 
?58  'teligraif  iks'pleind 

tu  iks'plein  'simpli  Sa  'waikirj  9v  Sa  'wAndras  'teligraif 
iz  a  'pAzl  fa  t5a  fi'losafa^;  an  nou  'wAnda  'simpl  'fouks  'kAm 
ta  'griif  ouva  Sa  'ta:sk.  tSa  'folouirj  iz  Si:*  'ekspla'nei/n 
'cjivn  tu  iz  'felou  bai  an  i'tseljan  'peznt. 

"'dount  ju;*  si:*  Souz  'poulz  n  'vvaiaz  Cat  'rAn  a'lorj 
bi'said  69  'reilwei?'* 

"  ai  'nou  Sset  iz  Sa  'teligra:f ;  bat  'hau^  daz  it  'wa:k  ? " 

"'nA9irj  mo:  'simpl;  ju:*  av  'ounli  ta  'tAtJ  'wau  'end  av 
5a  'waia,  an  'klik ! — Si:*  'ASar  end  'raits  it  'daun  'd3A8t  Sa 
'seim  az  a  'pen." 

"  'stil,  ai  'dount  kwait  'si:  hau  its  'dAn." 

'  Reproduced  by  kind  permission  of  Dr  Fuhrken  and  Dr  Rodhe. 
2  See  notes  on  p.  112. 

*  The  variations  in  the  quality  of  the  vowel  0  (Part  I,  §  172)  are 
indicated  in  Dr  Fuhrken's  transcriptions  by  distinguishing  two  varieties 
which  he  writes  a  and  9,  s  denoting  the  opener  variety.  The  distinction 
has  been  reproduced  above,  Dr  Fuhrken's  symbol  o  being  altered  to  6, 
because  ^  is  used  in  the  present  book  with  a  different  meaning  (Part  I, 
§  71). 

*  Dr  Fuhrken  uses  the  symbols  i,  u  for  the  sounds  represented  in 
this  book  by  i,  u,  and  he  uses  I,  u  to  represent  i:,  u:  in  cases  where, 
owing  to  want  of  stress,  the  sounds  are  very  short  (Part  I,  §  196,  1  (2)). 
The  words  marked  ^  on  this  page  and  *  on  the  next  are  the  cases  in 
which  he  indicates  in  this  way  that  the  vowel  sound  is  short. 

^  Dr  Fuhrken  uses  an  to  represent  the  diphthong  here  written  an 
(see  Part  I,  §§  135,  136). 


112  PHONETIC   TRANSCRIPTIONS 

^mi:^  'trai  ta  meik  it  'plein.     'haev  ju:^  a  'dog  ? " 

"'wot  daz  ill  'du:  if  ju:»  'pin/  iz  'teil  ? " 
'"ba:k,  tabii^'/ua." 

"'wel  Sen,  sa'pouzir)  joa  'dog  wa  'lorj  inAf  ta  'ri:t/  in 
'bodi  fram  'florans  'hia  ta  tJa  'ksepitl." 

":wel?"  .KK        .    .     . 

"it  iz  'klia  Sen  Sat  if  ju:^  'pi^^z  'teil  in  'florans  hi:* 
wil  'ba:k  in  'roum.  'Sea,  frend,  Saets  ig'zsektli  hcLu  Si;* 
i'lektrik  'teligra:f  wa;ks." 

Notes  on  the  pronunciation  of  Dr  Fuhrken 

Dr  Fuhrken  was  educated  in  Enghmd.  He  is  now 
lecturer  on  English  at  the  University  of  Gothenburg. 
He  speaks  typical  educated  Southern  English. 

Note  the  insertion  of  a  in  joa.  Dr  Fuhrken's  o  sound 
in  this  word  is  intermediate  in  quality  between  o  and  o:. 


18.    Oliver  Goldsmith 

A  passage  from  Beau  Tihhs  at  Vauxhall 

Pronunciation  of  Dr  E.  R.  Edwards  (London) 

ai  waz  'gouirj  tu  'sekand  (h)iz  ri'ma:ks,  wen  wi  wa  'koild 
tu  a  konsal'tei/an  bai  'mista  'tibz  an  Sa  'rest  av  Sa  'kAmpani, 
tu  'nou  in  'wot  'msena  wi  wa  tu  'lei  'aut  Si  'iivnirj  tu  Sa 
'greitist  ad'vaintidj.  'misiz  tibz  woz  fa  'ki:pir)  Sa  djen'tiil 
'work  av  Sa  'ga:dn,  'wea,  Ji  ab'za:vd.  Sea  waz  'oilwiz  Sa  veri 
'best  'kAmpani;  Sa  'widou  on  Sa  'kontrari,  hu  'keim  bat 
'wAns  a  'si:zn  W02  fa  si'kjuarir)  a  'gud  'stsendirj-pleis  tu  'si:  Sa 

^  See  note  4  on  previous  page. 


J 


PRONUNCIATION  OF  PARTICULAR  SPEAKERS         113 

'wo:taw8:ks,  wit/  Ji  a'/uod  as  Avud  bi'cjin  in  'les  San  on 
'aue(r)  at  'faiSast;  9  dis'pju:t  6eefo;  bi'gaen,  and  'aez  it  waz 
'msenid3d  bitwi;n  'tuw  av  'veri  'opazit  'kaeriktaz,  it  'Oretnd 
tu  grou  'mo:  'bita(r)  at  'evri  ri'plai.  'misiz  'tibz  'vvAndad 
hau  pi;pl  kud  pri'tend  tu  'nou  6a  pa'lait  'wa;ld,  hu  ad 
risiivd  'o:l  Sea  'ruidimants  av  'bri:dir)  bi'haind  a  'kaunta; 
tu  wit/  Si  'ASa  ri'plaid,  Sat  Sou  ^sAm  piipl  'saet  bi'haind 
'kauntaz,  jst  Sei  kud  'sit  at  Sa  'lied  av  Sear  'oun  'teiblz 
'tuw,  an  'ka:v  '0rij  'gud  'di/iz  av  'hot  'mi;t  wen'eva  Sei 
'0o:t  'propa; — wit/  waz  'mo:  San  'sAm  pi:pl  kud  'sei  fa 
Sam'selvz,  Sat  'ha:dli  njuw  a  'rsebit  i;i  'Anjanz  fram  a  'gri:n 
'gu:s  an  'guzbriz. 

it  s  'ha:d  tu  'sei  'wea  Sis  mait  av  'endid,  had  not  Sa 
'hAzband,  hu  'probabli  'njuw  Si  impetju'ositi  av  (h)iz  'waifs 
dispa'zi/an,  pra'pouzd  tu  'end  Sa  dis'pju:t  bai  a'd3a:nir)  tu 
a  'boks,  an  'trai  if  Sea  waz  'eniyir)  tu  bi  'ha3d  fa  'sApa  Sat 
waz  sa'po:tabl. 


Notes  on  the  pronunciation  of  Dr  Ediuards 

Dr  Edwards  spent  the  first  twelve  years  of  his  life  in 
Japan,  but  since  that  time  he  has  lived  chiefly  in  London. 
Most  of  his  education  was  received  in  the  South  of 
England. 

The  pronunciation  is  typical  educated  Southern 
English,  and  does  not  call  for  much  comment.     Note  that 

(1)  the  vowel  in  when,  less,  etc.  is  not  identical 
with  the  first  element  of  the  diphthong  ei,  but  is  the 
opener  sound  e ;  it  is  however  not  quite  so  open  as  the  e 
in  the  diphthong  ea, 

(2)  i:  and  u:  are  slightly  diphthongized. 


114  phonetic  transcriptions 

19.    Thomas  Huxley 

Apassage  hom  Discourses  Biological  and  Geological  (p.224)» 

Pronunciation  of  H.  D.  Ellis,  Esq.,  M.A,  (London) 

'wot  iz  Sa  'poipas  ov  'praimari  inta'lektjual  edju/kei/en  ? 
ai  'sepri'hend  Sat  its  'fa:st  'obd3ekt  iz  ta  'trein  6i  'JArj  in  Si 
'ju;s  av  'Souz  'tuilz  wsa'wi0  'men  eks'traekt  'noledj  from  Si; 
'eva'/iftir)  sak'se/an  ov  fa'nomina  wit/  'pa:s  ba'fo:  Ser  'aiz ; 
send  Sat  its  'sekand  obdsekt  iz  tu:  in'foim  Sam  ov  Sa  'fAn- 
da'mentl  'lo:z  wit/  av  bin  'faund  bai  eks'piirians  ta  'gAvan 
Sa  'ko:s  av  'Girjz,  sou  Sat  Sei  mei  'not  bi  taind  'aut  inta  Sa 
'wa:ld  'neiked,  da'fenslas,  send  a  'prei  tu  Si;  a'vonts  Sei  mait 
kan'troul. 

9  'boi  iz  'to;t  tu  'ri:d  hiz  'oun  and  'aSo  'laer)gwad3ez  in 
'o;da  Sat  hi;  mei  hasv  'aekses  tu  'infinitli  'waida  'stoiaz  av 
'noleds  Saen  kud  'eva  bi;  'oupnd  ta  him  bai  'oiral  'intako;s 
wis  hiz  'felou'men;  hi;  la;nz  tu  'rait,  Sat  hiz  'mi;nz  ev 
kamju;ni'kei/an  wiS  Sa  'rest  av  msen'kaind,  mei  bi  in- 
'definitli  en'la;d3d,  send  Sat  hi;  mei  ri'ko;d  and  'sto;r  'Ap 
Sa  'noled3  hi;  a'kwaiaz.  hi;  iz  'to:t  ela'mentari  mseQa- 
'msetiks,  Sset  hi;  mei  'Anda'stsend  'o;l  Souz  ra'lei/anz  ov 
'nAmba  send  'fo;m,  Apan  'wit/  Sa  trsenz'aek/anz  av  'men, 
a'sou/ieitid  in  'komplikeitid  so'saiatiz,  cl;  'bilt,  send  Sat 
hi;  mei  hsev  'sAm  'prsektis  in  da'dAktiv  'ri;znir). 

'o;l  Si:z  opa'rei/anz  av  'ri;dir),  'raitir)  send  'saifarirj  a;r 
inta'lektjual  'tu;lz,  hu;z  'ju;s  '/ud,  bafo;r  'o:l  0ir)z  bi  'la;nd 
send  'la;nd  '6Arali;  'sou  Sat  Si  'ju;9  mei  bi;  e'neibld  tu 
'meik  hiz  'laif  Sset  wit/  it  'o;t  ta  bi;,  a  kan'tinjual  'prougres 
in  'la;nir)  send  in  'wizdam. 

Notes  on  the  pronunciation  of  Mr  Ellis 
The  parents  of  Mr  Ellis  were  both  from  Devonshire. 
He  was  educated  in  the  South  of  England,  and  has  lived 
^  Ileproduced  by  kind  permission  of  the  publishers,  Messrs  Macmillan. 


PRONUNCIATION  OF  PARTICULAR  SPEAKERS         115 

in  London  for  many  years.  The  peculiarity  of  pronuncia- 
tion which  is  generally  most  characteristic  of  the  speech 
of  Devonshire  people,  viz.  the  inversion  of  the  tip  of 
the  tongue  in  pronouncing  vowels  which  are  followed 
by  r  + consonant  letter  or  r  final  (Part  I,  §  71),  is  not 
sufficiently  marked  in  Mr  Ellis'  pronunciation  to  require 
the  use  of  the  symbols  o,  o  etc.  in  the  transcription. 

The  following  are  the  chief  points  in  which  Mr  Ellis' 
pronunciation  differs  from  StP  as  defined  in  Part  I,  §§  1,  2. 

(1)  o  is  used  in  weak  of,  from  etc. 

(2)  Weak  i  of  StP  is  sometimes  replaced  by  a  (as  in 
dd'fenslas),  and  sometimes  by  e  as  in  'obdgekt,  eks'traekt. 

(3)  The  form  tSi  and  not  tJa  is  used  in  "Si  jatj 
«i  ju:s,  «i  ju:e. 

(4)  i:  is  used  in  the  second  syllable  of  experience. 

(5)  9  is  inserted  after  the  o:  in  stores. 

(6)  and  is  generally  aend. 

20.    R.  J.  Lloyd 
A  passage  from  the  Daily  Mail,  22nd  Oct.  1897, 
as  transcribed  in  Lloyd's  Northern  English^ 
Pronuuciation  of  R.  J.  Lloyd,  Esq.,  M.A.,  D.Litt.  (Liverpool)  ^ 
'insekts  in  'lapland 
'eniwan   hu   ho;ps   tu   me:k   ae  'kamfatabl  'dsaini  in 
'lapland  Jod  'nsva  me:k  Sae  mis'teik  ov  9'raivir)  Se  i/kwipt 
^  Reproduced  by  kind  permission  of  the  publishers,  Messrs  Teubuer 
of  Leipzig.     Some  of  the  symbols  used  by  Dr  Lloyd  are  not  quite  the 
same  as  those  used  in  this  book ;  the  corresponding  symbols  according  to 
the  notqjiion  used  here  have  of  course  been  substituted,  the  values 
attached  to  Dr  Lloyd's  symbols  being  gathered  from  the  descriptions 
given  in  the  earlier  part  of  his  book.     One  or  two  obvious  misprints 
have  been  corrected.     Stress  marks  have  also  been  added ;  they  are  only 
given  here  and  there  in  the  original, 
*  See  notes  on  p.  117. 

8—2 


116  PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 

£ez  sen  '?:dinari  'tuirist.  its  fe  kantri  ^"tet  ae'baundz  in 
mos'kiitoz  8n(d)  'noits,  send  'if  Saz  ae  'flai  'moa  pa'sistaent 
?5an  a'naSa  its  as  'no:t.  ae  'no:t  iz  ae  'smoil  'kriitja  wie  6i 
'obstinasi  ov  ae  'handraed  mas'kiitoz,  and  Sae  'pe:/n:s^  ov 
'ten  'djoibz.  ae  mas'kiito  'heraldz  iz  'o:n  fe'proitj  wi0  ae 
'menaesir)  'baz:^.  hi  'hovaz  a'raund,  aend  if  Si(j)  in'tsnded 
'viktim  iz  'kwik,  ^iid  'pest  kan  bi  'kild,  aend  'i:zili  kild ;  So: 
ov  'ko;as,  if  Sae  kriitjaz  sb'tak  in  bae'taljanz,  Sae  'ho:l  'namba 
'ka:nt^  bi  'slo:tad,  aend  'viktari  mast  go:  tu  Sa  'meni.  Sae 
'no:t  on  Si(j)  aSa  hand,  iz  'saila?nt  aend  ^'peira'ntli*  'ha:mla?s. 
hi;  ae'raivz  anob'tru:sivli.  hi  'stroilz  as'baut  ae  bit,  az  if  hi 
wa  'not  in  Sae  'liist  bit  'harjgri,  bat  'o:nli  ae  litl  'pleznitli* 
irj'kwizitiv.  'hwot  'ha:m  kod  sat/  ae  'smo:l  0ir)  'du:  tu  ju 
'6ik  'nited  'stokirjz  ?  bat  ?aB  'bi:k  ov  Sae  no:t  iz  'lor),  aend 
havir)  't/o:zn:^  (h)iz  'roindivu:,  Si  'oinar  ov  Sat  bi:k  pro'siidz 
tu  'baro  wiS  it,  wiS  ae  ri'zalt  c^ifets  oilta'geSa  sa'praizir),  aend 
'sa:taenli  'moist  'pe:infl:^  Sae  'lap  him'self  'steiinz  (h)iz 
'fe;s  wis  ae  mikstjar  ov  'ta:r  aen(d)  'griis,  hwitj  Sae  kri:tjaz 
'do:nt  'laik.  mo:'ro:var  its  ae  'fakt  Saet  Sae  mas'ki:to  8en(d) 
'npit  'domt  ae'se.'il  Sae  'ne:tivz  aez  Se;i  du  'streiindjaz.  ae 
'mask  ov  'Sis  'steiin,  send  ae  'harjkat/if,  'ple;st  in'said  Sae 
'kap  aend  'left  tu  'hag  'daun  bi'haind,  cl  Sae  'ne;tiv  pri'ko;/n:\ 
bat  Sae  'tuirist  Gigks  ov  "'igglaend,  'ho;m  aend  'bju:ti/'  send 
'probabli  'daznt  'relij  dis'gaizig  (h)iz  kam'plek/n:  intu  'Sat 
ov  ae  mju'lato.  so;  hi  'me:ks  (h)im'self 'mizarabl  bai  'trai(j)ig 
tu  'we:r*  ae  've;il,  samSig  laik  ae  'mi;tse:f,  from  hwit/  'o;l 
Sae  'wa;ld  luks  laik  'milkaen(d)'wo:ta,  tijnd  hi  'briiSz  wi9  ae 
'safoke;tig  'fiilig,  aez  if  hi  wa  on  Sae  'point  ov  't/o:kig  9 
'fe:intig,  o  duiig  samGig  'iikwoli  an'manli. 

^  n:  denotes  a  lengthened  n.  ^  z:  denotes  a  lengthened  z. 

3  The  original  gives  ka:nt,  but  this  appears  to  be  a  misprint,  judging 
by  the  remarks  on  the  sounds  a  and  a:  given  in  the  previous  part  of 
Pr  Lloyd's  book. 

*  t:  denotes  a  lengthened  c.  '  L  denotes  a  lengthened  1. 


PRONUNCIATION   OF  PARTICULAR  SPEAKERS         117 

Notes  on  the  pronunciation  of  Dr  Lloyd 

The  late  Dr  Lloyd  was  bom  and  brought  up  in  Liver- 
pool and  spent  most  of  his  life  there.  His  degrees  were 
obtained  at  the  University  of  London.  He  was  a  Fellow 
of  the  Royal  Society  of  Edinburgh,  and  Honorary  Reader 
in  Phonetics  at  the  University  College,  Liverpool. 

The  following  are  the  chief  points  in  which  his  pronun- 
ciation differs  from  StP  as  defined  in  Part  I,  §§  1,  2 : — 

(1)  The  half-open  6  (Part  I,  §  118)  is  used  in  left, 
pleasant,  etc. 

(2)  The  presence  of  the  letter  r  in  the  spelling 
when  not  followed  by  a  vowel,  is  indicated  by  inversion 
of  the  tip  of  the  tongue  during  the  pronunciation  of  the 
preceding  vowel  (Part  I,  §  71),  as  in  d5a:ni,  ko:as,  no:t. 

(3)  The  fully  open  a  is  used  in  Lapland,  etc.     - 

(4)  .Weak  vowels  e,  ae,  d,  o  are  used  as  in  the 
declamatory  style  of  Standard  Southern  English,  though 
not  always  in  the  same  cases. 

(5)  o:  and  e:  or  e:i  are  used  where  StP  has  ou,  ei. 
Pure  e:  is  used  when  a  breathed  consonant  follows,  and 
e:i  in  other  cases. 

(6)  a  is  used  in  stressed  syllables  in  haijgri,  rizalt, 
etc. 

(7)  i:  is  used  in  the  first  syllable  of  equipped, 

(8)  j  is  used  in  kriitja,  mikstjar. 

(9)  0  is  used  in  with. 

(10)     Tj  is  used  in  inquisitive. 
Note  also  that  the  r  sound  is  generally  rolled  but 
sometimes  becomes  fricative  (Part  I,  §  95)  when  preceded 
by  a  consonant. 


118  phonetic  transcriptions 

21.    Thomas  B.  Macaulay 

A  passage  from  the  History  of  England 

Pronunciation  of  R.  P.  Houghton  Blorb,  Esq.,  B.A.  (Lancashire) 

it  wud  'not  bi  'difiklt  tu  kom'poiz  9  Igem'pum  or 
paeni'dgirik  on  'aiSo  ev  '5i:z  ri'naund  'fsekjnz.  fo  'no: 
msen  'not  'Atoli  'destitjut  ov  'djAdjmnt  sen  'ksendua  wil 
di'nai  Sset  Cor  o  'mem  'di;p  'ste;nz  on  6o  'fe:m  ov  So  'pa:ti 
tu  'MitJ  i  bi'loTjz,  o  Saet  So  'paiti  tu  AitJ  i  iz  o'po:zd  me: 
'djAstli  'bo:st  ov  'msni  i'lAstrJAS  'ne:mz,  ov  'mem  hi'roik 
'sek/nz  sen  ov  'msni  'gre:t  'so:visiz  'rendad_to  tJo  'ste:t.  So 
'tru:e  'iz  Sset  So  'bo:9  pa:tiz  hov  'ofri(^rJAsli/o:d,  'iijglond 
kud  hov  'speod  'naiSo,  'if,  in  hor  instP^uJnz^  'fri:dom  ond 
'o:do,  Si  sed'vsentidsiz  o'raizir)  from  ino've:/n  ond  Si  sed'vsen- 
tidgiz  oraizir)  from  pris'krip/n,  haev  bi:n  kom'baind  tu  on 
eks'tsnt  'elsAveo  An'noin,  Mi  me:  e'tribjut  Sis  'hsepi  pikju- 
li'seriti  tu  So  'strsnjuAs  'konflikts  end  ol'to:nst  'viktonz  ov 
'tu:  'raivl  kon'fedorisiz  ov  'ste:tsmn. 

Notes  on  the  pronunciation  of  Mr  Blore 
Mr  Blore's  parents  were  from  Lancashire.     He  was 
educated  in  Lancashire  and  graduated  at  London  Uni- 
versity. 

The  following  are  the  chief  points  in  which  his  pro- 
nunciation differs  from  StP  as  defined  in  Part  I,  §§  1,  2  : — 

(1)  o:  and  e:  are  used  where  StP  has  ou,  ei. 

(2)  Syllabic  consonants  are  very  frequent. 

(3)  o  is  used  in  the  first  syllable  of  compose,  conflict 
(verb),  in  the  second  syllable  of  innovation,  in  unstressed 
for,  from  etc. 

(4)  StP  ia  is  replaced  by  ja  or  JA. 

(5)  8B  is  used  in  the  second  syllable  of  advantage. 


I»RONUNCIATION   OF   PARTICULAR  SPEAKERS  119 

(6)  U3  is  used  in  the  second  syllable  of  candour. 

(7)  lA  (Part  I,  §  81)  is  used  in  which,  where  etc.; 
also  in  we.  (The  distinction  made  by  Mr  Blore  is  that  m 
is  used  before  front  vowels  and  w  before  back  vowels.) 

(8)  u  is  used  in  the  ending  -ute  etc. 

(9)  e  is  used  in  the  last  syllable  of  alternate. 

(10)  A  is  sometimes  used  for  StP  a  as  in  the  last 
syllables  of  illustrious,  strenuous. 

The  following  points  should  also  be  noted,  which  do 
not  appear  from  the  transcription : — 

(11)  o:  and  e:  are  often  slightly  diphthongised ;  they 
are  not  very  tense. 

(12)  r  is  the  rolled  consonant  (Part  I,  §  68),  but  is 
not  very  strongly  rolled. 

(13)  6  sometimes  tends  towards  e. 

22.    Thomas  B,  Macaulay 

A  passage  from  the  History  of  England  (on  Laud) 
Pronunciation  of  B.  Lockhart,  Esq.  (Scotland) 

tSa  si'viarast  'pAni/mont  wit/  5a  'tu;  'hauziz  kad  av 
in'fliktid  wud  av  bi:n  ta  'set  im  at  'libati  an  'send  im  tu 
'oksfad.  '5e:a  hi  mait  av  'steid,  'toitjad  bai  hiz  'oun 
daia'bolikl  'tempa,  'hAijgrir)  fa  'pjuritanz  ta  'pilari  an 
'mserjgl,  'pleigirj  t5a  kseva'lioz,  fa  'wont  av  'sAmbadi  'els  -ta 
pleig,  wis  iz  'piivi/nis  and  seb'saiditi,  pa'foimir)  gri'meisiz 
and  'sentiks  in  Sa  ka3'9i:drol,  kan'tinjuir)  Gaet  irj'komparabl 
'daiari,  wit/  wi  'neva  'si:  wiSaut  fa'getir)  6a  'vaisiz  av  iz 
'ha:t  in  5a  imbe'siliti  av  iz  'intilekt,  mai'njuitir)  'daun  hiz 
'driimz,  'kauntir)  (5a  'drops  av  'bUd  wit/  'fel  fram  iz  'nouz, 
'wot/irj  3a  dai'rek/n  av  Sa  'soilt,  an  'lisnir)  fa  tJa  'nout  av  tSa 


120  PHONETIC   TRANSCRIPTIONS 

'skri:t/  aulz.  kan'temtjuas  'mo:si  waz  Sa  'ounli  'vend38ns 
wit/  it  bi'keim  tJa  'pa:bmant  ta  'teik  on  SAtJ  a  ri'dikjalas 
ould  'bigat. 

Notes  on  the  pronunciation  of  Mr  Loclchart 
Mr  Lockhart  is  of  Scottish  parentage.     He  was  edu- 
cated in  Scotland  and  on  the  Continent.     He  has  lived 
for  many  years  in  the  South  of  England. 

The  following  are  the  chief  points  in  which  his  pro- 
nunciation differs  from  StP  as  defined  in  Part  I,  §§  1,  2  : — 

(1)  The  inverted  vowels  a,  o:,  etc.  are  used  (Part  I, 
§71). 

(2)  j  is  used  in  toitjad. 

(3)  No  9  is  inserted  after  the  u  in  pjuritdnz. 

(4)  ae  is  used  in  the  first  syllable  of  absurdity. 

(5)  Tj  is  used  in  incomparable. 

(6)  ai  is  used  in  the  first  syllable  of  direction, 

(7)  9  is  used  in  the  before  vowels. 

23.    John  Ruskin 

A  passage  from  Modem  Painters 

Pronunciation  of  J.  H.  Fudge,  Esq.,  M.A.  (London) 

'gaeSar  a  'sirjgl  'bleid  av  'gra:s,  and  eg'zaemin  far  a  minit, 

'kwaiatli,   its  'noero   'so:ad-/eipt  'strip   ov  'flu:tid   'grim. 

'na9ir)  aez  it  'si:mz  'Sea,  av  'noutabl  'gudnas  o  'bjuti.     a 

'veri  litl  'strer)9,  and  a  'veri  litl  'toilnas,  and  a  'fju:  'delikat 

'lor)  'lainz  'mi;tir)  in  a  'point,  'not  a  'paifikt  point  'naiSa, 

bAt  'bUnt  and  'An'fini/t,  bai  'nou  mi:nz  a  'kreditabl  or 

se'paerantli 'mAtJ 'kead  fo  cg'zaimpl  av 'neit/az 'wa:kman/ip, 

'meid  aez  it  'si:mz  'onli  ta  bi  'trodn  on  tu'dei,  send  ta'moro 

tu  bi  'kaist  intu  5i  'avn ;  send  a  'litl  'peil  and  'holou  'sto:k, 

'fi;bl  and  'flaeksid,  'liidirj  'daun  tu  tJa  'dal  'braun  'faibaz 

av  'ruits.     an  'jet,  '0ir)k  av  it  'wel  jend  'd^Adj  hweSar  ev 


PRONUNCIATION   OF   PARTICULAR  SPEAKER..  121 

'oil  Sa  'goid^JAs  'flauaz  Sat  'bi;m  in  'sAmar  'ea,  and  av  'o:l 
'stror)  and  'gudli  'tri:z,  'pleznt  tu  5i  'aiz  o  'gud  fa  'fu:d — 
'steitli  'pa:m  and  'pain,  'stror)  'aej  and  'ouk,  'sentid  'sitron, 
'baidnd  'vain — ^Sea  bij  'eni  bai  'maen  sou  'di:pli  'lAvd,  bai 
'god  sou  'haili  'greist  sez  5aet  'nsero  'point  av  'fi:bl  'grim. 

Notes  on  the  pronunciation  of  Mr  Fudge 
Mr  Fudge's  parents  were  from  Dorsetshire.     He  was 
born  and  educated  in  Hampshire  and  at  Bristol,  and  took 
his  M.A.  degree  at  the  University  of  London. 

The  following  are  the  chief  points  in  which  his  pro- 
nunciation differs  from  StP  as  defined  in  Parti,  §§  1,  2: — 

(1)  e  is  used  in  the  first  syllable  of  exam^jle, 
examine. 

(2)  The  inverted  vowels  a,  o  etc.  are  used  (Part  I, 

§71). 

(3)  9  is  used  in  the  last  syllable  of  goodness, 
delicate,  etc. 

(4)  The  vowel  in  sword  is  diphthongised. 

The  following  points  should  also  be  noted,  which  do 
not  appear  from  the  transcription : — 

(5)  r  is  always  fricative  and  tends  towards  the 
inverted  consonant  x  (Part  I,  §  96). 

(6)  The  a  in  ai  is  identical  with  that  in  au, 
namely  a  vowel  intermediate  between  the  sounds  a  and 
a  as  defined  in  Part  I,  §§  123,  129. 

(7)  All  the  vowels  are  rather  laxer  than  in  Stan- 
dard Pronunciation  with  the  exception  of  o:  and  o  which 
often  tend  towards  o:. 

,  (8)     The  u  sounds  tend  towards  the  mixed  vowel  ii 
(Parti,  §153). 

(9)  The  inversion  in  the  vowels  a,  o,  etc.  (Part  1, 
§  71)  tends  to  disappear  when  speaking  carefully. 


122  PHONETIC   TRANSCRIPTIONS 


24.    Sir  Walter  Scott 


A  passage  from  Old  Mortality 
Pronunciation  of  Miss  B.  Robson,  M.A.  (Edinburgh) 

'i:vnir)  'lo;ard  eraund  'mortn  az  hi;  ad'vainst  Ap  Sa  'nsero 
'del  A\it/  mAst  hav  'wAns  bi;n  a  'wuid,  bat  waz  'nau  9  ra'vim 
di'vestid  af  'tri:z,  An'les  A\er  q  'fju:  fram  tJer  inaek'sesibl 
sitju'ei/n  on  5i  'edg  af  pri'sipitAS  'baerjks,  or  'klirjir)  amAij  'roks 
and  '9u;d3  'stomz  da'faid  5i  in'veign  af  'men  and  af  'kaetl 
Idik  Sa  'sksetard  'traibz  af  a  'korjkard  'kAntri,  'drivn  ta  te;k 
'refju.'dj  in  Sa  'bseran  'strer)9  af  its  'mauntnz.  '5i:z  'tu:, 
'we.'stad  and  di'keid,  si;md  raiSar  tu:  eg'zist  Saen  ta  'fUriJ,  • 
and  'oinli  'sairvd  tu:  'indikeit  'A\ofc  t5a  'laenske:p  mast  'wAns 
hav  'bi:n.  bat  Sa  'stri:m  'bro:ld  'daun  amAr)  (5am  in  'o:l  its 
'fre/nas  and  vi'vsesiti,  givir)  Sa  'laif  and  3eni'me:/n  A\it/  a  { 
'mauntn  'rivjurlat  a'lo:n  kten  kon'fer  on  Sa  'be:rast^  and 
mo:st  'saevidj  'si:nz,  and  AvitJ  Si  in'hgebitants  af  SAtJ  a 
'kAntri  'mis  Men  'ge:zir)  i:vn  apon  Sa  'trserjkwil  'waindir)  af 
a  m8e'd3estik  'stri:m  6ru;  'ple:nz  af  fsr'tiliti,  and  basaid 
'paelisaz  af  'splendar.  Sa  'traek  af  ?Ja  'ro:d  'folo:d  ?5a  'ko:rs 
af  Sa  'bru:k  A\it/  waz  'nau  'vizibl,  and  'nau  'oinli  ta  bi 
dis'tirjgwi/t  bai  its  'bro:lir)  'ha:rd  amAr)  Sa  'sto:nz,  or  in  Ca 
'klefts  af  Sa  'roks,  Sat  o'ke:3anali  inta'rAptad  its  'ko:rs. 

"'ma:rmarar  Sat  Sau  'a:rt,"  sed  'mortn,  in  Si  en'Guiziazm 
af  hiz  'reveri,  "'Aiai  't/e:f  \vi(0)  Sa  'roks  Sat  'stop  Sai  'ko:rs 
far  a  'mo:mant?  Ser  iz  a  'si:  ta  ri'si:v  Si:  in  its  'bu:zam;  end 
Ser  iz  an  i:'terniti  far  'msen  A\en  hiz  'fretfl  and  'he:sti  'ko:rs 
9ru:  Sa  've:l  af 'taim  Jal  bi  'si:st  and  'o:var.  'A\ot  'Sai  'peti 
'fju:mir)  iz  ta  Sa  'di:p  and  'va:st  'biloz  af  8  '/o:rlas  'o:/n,  a:r 
'aur  'ke:rz,  'ho:ps,  'fi:rz,  'djoiz,  and  'soroz,  ta  Si  'obd3akts 
A\it/  mAst  'okju:pai  as  Bru:  Si:  'o:fl  and  'baundlas  sAk'se/n 
af'eidjoz." 

>  c:  denotes  a  lengthened  c. 


PRONUNCIATION  OF  PARTICULAR  SPEAKERS         123 

Notes  on  the  pronunciation  of  Miss  Robson 

Miss  Robson  is  of  Scottish  parentage  and  was  educated 
in  Edinburgh.  She  is  Lecturer  on  Phonetics  to  the  Edin- 
burgh Provincial  Committee  for  the  Training  of  Teachers. 

The  following  are  the  chief  points  in  which  her  pro- 
nunciation differs  from  StP  as  defined  in  Part  I,  §§  1,  2  : — 

(1)  e:,  o:  are  used  where  StP  has  ei,  ou. 

(2)  e  is  used  in  confer,  fertility,  eternity. 

(3)  M.,  the  breathed  consonant  corresponding  to 
the  voiced  w,  is  used  in  which,  where,  etc. 

(4)  9,  the  breathed  consonant  corresponding  to  the 
voiced  j  (Part  I,  §  99),  is  used  in  huge  (cuidj). 

(5)  The  tense  u:  is  used  where  Southern  English 
has  the  lax  u,  as  in  wood,  bosom,  etc. 

(6)  fisusedino/(af). 

(7)  9  is  frequently  used  where  Southern  English 
has  unstressed  i,  e.g.  in  freshness  (frejnas),  wasted 
(weistad).     e  is  however  used  in  exist  (egzist). 

(8)  The  second  syllable  of  mountains  contains  no 
vowel. 

(9)  Strong  vowels  are  used  in  the  first  syllables  of 
succession,  occasionally. 

(10)  The  r  sound  is  used  even  where  no  vowel  follows. 
Note  also  the  following  points  which  do  not  appear 

from  the  transcription : — 

(11)  Differences  of  quantity  are  not  so  great  as  in 
Southern  English. 

(12)  Tlje  r  sound  is  always  rolled. 


124  phonetic  transcriptions 

25.    Robert  Louis  Stevenson 

A  passage  from  Treasure  Island  (Chap.  13) 

Pronunciation  of  J.  Sinclair,  Esq.,  M.A.  (Glasgow) 

Si  e'piiarans  ov  6i  'ailand  hwen  ai  'ke;im  on  'dek  nekst 
'mo.'rnir)  woz  'oiltageSa  'tje:md3d.  oil'Sou  tSa  'bri:z  hsed 
'nau  'Atarli  'feiild,  wi  had  me:id  a  'greiit  did  ov  'we:i 
djuriT)  Sa  'nait,  send  we:r  'nau  'laiir)  bi'ka:md  abaut  'haf 
a  'mail  tu  Sa  'sau6  'i:st  ov  ?5a  'loiu  'i;stsrn  'ko:ust.  'gre:i 
kAlard  'wudz  kAvard  a  'lcLrd3  'part  ov  Sa  'sArfis.  'Sis  'i:vn 
'tint  woz  in'diid  'broiukan  'Ap  bai  'stri:ks  ov  'jelom  'ssend- 
bre:ik  in  5a  'lo:uar  'laendz,  and  bai  'mem  'to:l  'tri:z  ov 
t5a  'pain  fa3raili,  'aut'topir)  6i  'ASarz — ^'sAm  'sirjgli,  'sAm  in 
'kUmps;  bAt  Sa  'd3ensrol  'kAlarir)  waz  'junifo:m  and  'saed. 
Sa  'hilz  rasn  Ap  'kli:ar  a'bAv  Sa  ved3i'te:i/n  in  'spaiarz  ov 
'neikid  'rok.  'o:l  we;r  'stre:in3li  '/e:ipt  and  5a  'spaiglais 
hwit/  woz  bai  '6ri  or  'for  'hAndrid  'fi:t  5d  'todest  on  5i 
'ailand  waz  'laikwaiz  5a  'stre:in3est  in  konficyu'red/n,  'rAnir) 
'Ap  '/i:ar  from  odmast  'evri  'said  and  'Sen  'sAdnli  'kAt  'of  at 
5a  'top  laik  a  'pedistoel  tu  'put  a  'staetju  on. 

Notes  on  the  pronunciation  of  Mr  Sinclair 

Mr  Sinclair  was  born  and  educated  in  Glasgow.  His 
father  was  a  Scotsman  and  his  mother  from  the  North 
of  England.     He  has  lived  for  many  years  in  England. 

The  following  are  the  chief  points  in  which  his  pronun- 
ciation differs  from  StP  as  defined  in  Part  I,  §§  1,  2 : — 

(1)  i:  is  used  in  clear  etc. 

(2)  Words  such  as  of,  and  etc.  are  frequently 
pronounced  with  strong  vowels  even  when  unstressed. 
Similarly  in  the  second  syllable  of  easier ti. 


PRONUNCIATION   OF   PARTICULAR   SPEAKERS  125 

(3)  r  is  pronounced  even  where  no  vowel  follows 
(except  in  the  word  oiltagelSa). 

(4)  Tense  e:  and  o:  are  used  in  the  diphthongs 
e:i,  o:u. 

(5)  No  9  is  inserted  in  words  like  where,  the  first 
syllable  of  dmnng,  etc. 

(6)  A  is  used  in  the  first  syllable  of  surface. 

(7)  e  is  used  in  the  last  syllable  of  tallest,  strangest. 

(8)  o  is  used  in  off. 

^The  following  points  should  also  be  noted,  which  do 
not  appear  from  the  transcription : — 

(9)  The  sound  i:  is  very  tense  indeed. 

(10)  The  sound  ae  tends  towards  a. 

(11)  There  is  a  tendency  to  omit  r  when  final  or 
followed  by  a  consonant,  when  speaking  carefully. 

(12)  There  is  a  marked  tendency  to  insert  ?  (Part  I, 
§  47)  at  the  beginning  of  words  which  generally  begin 
with  a  vowel,  e.g.  to  say  woz  Po:ltdget$a  instead  of  woz 
oiltagetSa. 


V.    LONDON  DIALECT 

26.     W.  Pett  Ridge 

A  passage  from  London  Only^ 

"'Aiv  'fgeund  am!"  sed  (h)iz  'Isenleidi  ig'zAltantli,  az 
(h)i;  'stAmbld  inta.  Sa  'nserou,  'dimli  'laitid  'psesidj.  /i: 
'fcaind  'Ap  Sa  litl  'oil'lsemp  'stsendir)  on  Sa  'braekit,  and  Si 
'oil'laemp,  a'noid,  bigoen  ta  'smouk  'ijuariasli.  "'aIv  'faeund 
am,  mista  'meriweSa,  n  'glsd  'naf  a!  'em  ta  a  bein  a  'sam 
'sa:vis  tm  ja."  /i;  waz  a  vai'vei/as  ould  'leidi  in  9  'bi:did 
'kaep  wis  a  'laivli  'nolid^  av  Si  a'feaz  av  'ASa  'piipl,  and 
'd3Ast  'nau  'kimli  'intristid^  in  Sa  'nju;  'okjupant  av  ha: 
'bed'sitirjrum.  "  nd  3a  'masn  'eer)k  mi,  koz  Aim  'aunli  'tiii 
'pleizd  ta  brir)  'frenz  n  'rePtivz'  ta'geSa." 

"'nsBu  wot  /a  'keklin  abseat,  mam  ?"  hi:  'a:skt  pa'laitli. 

"'a:,"  riplaid  Si  'ould  'leidi  't/iafuli,  "jo:P  'siUn  'nau. 
wi  '/A:nt  bi  'lor)  'noeu.  it  P  bi  az  'gud  az  a  'plai  ta  'sei  'jiii 
'fiii  'meit."  /i:  'wept  and  'rAbd  ha:r  'aiz.  "'peipP  ma  'sai 
wot  Sa  'kik,  bat  Se:az  'nafirjk  in  'o:P  Sis  'wAid  'wa:Pd  ta  bi 
kam'pe:ad  ta  'fiii  'lavin  'A:ts." 

^  This  piece  is  reproduced  by  the  kind  permission  of  Mr  Pett  Kidge. 
The  descriptive  parts  are  transcribed  in  Standard  Pronunciation  and  the 
dialogue  in  one  of  the  many  forms  of  uneducated  London  Pronunciation. 

2  Or  'intoresUd. 

3  1*  denotes  a  variety  of  1  sound  in  which  the  main  part  of  the  tongue 
is  in  the  position  of  the  vowel  o.     See  Part  I,  §§  61,  G3. 


LONDON   DIALECT  127 

"'let  mi  'ev  mAi  'sapa,"  hi:  'sed  'pei/ntli,  "n  'Sen  'leiv 
mi  'bei.     Ai  'wont  to  ev  q  'smauk  n  9  '<3ir)k." 

"'jiti  'waun  'dm  mat/  'dirjkin,"  rima:kt  Sa  'laenleidi 
'nouirjli,  "  wen  jar  'i;a  5a  'niiiz  Ai  v  'got  fo:  ja.  ja  'sed  3a 
'naim  waz  'meriweSa,  'didnt  /a  ? " 

"  Ai  'daunt  di'nAi  it." 
.  "nd  3a  'sed  33  d  got  'frcnz  ni:ar  'i;a — ja  d  fa'got  5i 
a'dres." 

"  Ai  mAit  a  'let  'fo:P  a  'ke3P  ri'mAik,"  sed  'bel  'keafuli, 
az  (h)i:  'held  Sa  'hsendl  av  (h)iz  'do:,  "o:wa  'staitmant  ta 
'Set  'fekt.     wot'cvar  aI  'sed  'aI  P  'stik  fiii." 

^  "'Ai  'niii  'Set,"  riplaid  Si  'ould  'Isenleidi.  "'Ai  'aup  Ai 
kn  'teP  a  'd3enlmn  fram  a  'mi:a  'koman  pa:sn.  'sam  peipP 
'luk  'dgeun  on  'sailaz  n  'sat/Uik,  bat  'Aim  'not  'wan  a  'Set 
so:t.  ez  'Ai  'o:fn  'sai,  'weia  d  'auPd  'hirjland  bei  wiS'aeut 
am!" 

"  'ari  'ap  wa  Set  'sapa,"  sed  mista  'bel. 

"  Jl  Ai  'lai  fa  'fiii,  mista  'meriweSa  ? "  aiskt  Si  'ould 
'leidi. 

"  'ko:s  not !  Ai  m  'aunli  'wan." 

"batSa'laidei?" 

"'wot'laidei?" 

"'wAi,"  Ji  sed,  "'jo:wa  'wAif!"  'mista  'bel  'puld  Sa 
'hoendl  fram  Sa  'do:(r)  and  'stud  'lukirj  set  (h)a:  'blserjkli. 
Sa  'Isenleidi  geiv  a  'd3est/ar  av  'selfri'pruivl.  "Set  s  'mei 
'o:l  'auva.  Ai  fa'get  wot  Ai  'ev  'sed  n  Ai  fa'get  wot  Ai  'evnt 
sed.  wot  Ai  'o:t  t  0  tauPd  3a  bi'fo:wa  'bla:tn  it  'seut  kik 
'Set  woz  Sat  Ai  v  dis'kavad  3a  'wAif,  'misas  'meriweSa,  in 
'grandei  'streit ;  Sat  Jei  z  'simpli  auvo'd3oid  ta  'i:ar  ov  ja, 
n  Ai  v  'A:st  a  ta  'kam  'i:a  Sis  'eivnin." 

"'Sen,"  sed  mista  'bel  'solamli,  and  'Jeikirj  Sa  'wait 
'do:hsendl  in  Si  'ould  'leidiz  'feis,  "'jm  'djes  'lisn  ta  'meL 


128  PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS 

'jiii  V  'Aist  9  ta  'kam  'i;o ;  ja  kn  'd^es  'dpli  weP  'Aist  9  to 
•gau  a'wai  egain.     a!  m  'not  'gain  ta  'sei  a." 

"'weP,  'weP,  'weV"  sed  Si  a'meizd  'Isenleidi,  "'i;a  z  a 
priti  'seud3a'diu !  n  Ji  'toikt  'sau  'fek/nt  a'bseat  /a  'fiii,  n 
/i  'sez,  '  'au '  Ji  sez,  *  aI  'diii  'sau  'log  ta  'luk  on  mi  'sweit 
wanz  'fais  again.*  Ai  ed  Sa  'leist  'drop  a  'spirits  wiS  a,  n 
wi  'drsgk  'joiwa  'gud  'ePO." 

"'veri  'kAind  ov  ja,"  sed  mista  'bel  'dogidli,  "bat  '6et 
'daunt  'fekt  'mAi  p'zi/n.  'wen  Ji  'kamz,  'jiii  get  'rid  av  a, 
n  in  'fiut/a  'daug  'gau  'potrin  a'boeut  n  'miksn  jasePf  'ap 
in  'mAi  a'feiaz,  koz  Ai  'waunt  'ev  it.  'sei  ?  Ai  got  'plenti  ta 
'wari  abaeat,"  sedid  mista  'bel  'fiasli — "'mo:wa  Sn  'jiii  '6igk 
foiwa;  n  Ai  'daun  'wont  'nau  hinta'fi:rin  'auP  'ket— " 

"  'wen  j  a  'kwAit  'dan  'jiiizn  'hggwidj,"  inta'rAptid  Si 
'ould  'leidi,  'braidlig,  "'prsps  ja  P  'kAinli  'put  'bsk  Set 
'do:warendP  weia  ja  'fseund  it.  'letn  jiU  mAi  'grseun'floiwa 
'frant  fr  a  'poiPtri  'foiwarn'siks  a  'weik  'daunt  n'tAitP  ja  ta 
'wo:k  a'baeut  wiS  'bits  av  it  in  jar  'snz.  sa  'Se:a,  nseu!" 
Ji:  'went  to:dz^  Sa  'kit/in,  sa'lilakwaizig.  "'hinta'fi:rin 
auP  'ket  ndeid  I  *Ai  I'  'lam  im ! " 

^  Or  towo:dz. 


APPENDIX 

ORDINARY  SPELLING  OF  ALL  THE  PIECES 
TRANSCRIBED  IN  PART  II 

1.    C.  Bronte 
Passage  from  Jane  Eyre 

All  the  house  was  still ;  for  I  believe  all,  except  St  John  and 
myself,  were  now  retired  to  rest.  The  one  candle  was  dying  out ; 
the  room  was  full  of  moonlight.  My  heart  beat  fast  and  thick; 
I  heard  its  throb.  Suddenly  it  stood  still  to  an  inexpressible 
feeling  that  thrilled  it  through,  and  passed  at  once  to  my  head 
and  extremities.  The  feeling  was  not  like  an  electric  shock,  but 
it  was  quite  as  sharp,  as  strange,  as  startling ;  it  acted  on  my  senses 
as  if  their  utmost  activity  hitherto  had  been  but  torpor,  from  which 
they  were  now  summoned  and  forced  to  wake.  They  rose  expectant ; 
eye  and  ear  waited  while  the  flesh  quivered  on  my  bones. 

"  What  have  you  heard  ?  What  do  you  see  ? "  asked  St  John. 
I  saw  nothing,  but  I  heard  a  voice  somewhere  cry — 

"  Jane !  Jane !  Jane ! " — nothing  more. 

"0  God !  what  is  it  ?"  I  gasped. 

I  might  have  said,  "Where  is  it?"  for  it  did  not  seem  in  the 
room,  nor  in  the  house,  nor  in  the  garden  ;  it  did  not  come  out  of 
the  air,  nor  from  under  the  earth,  nor  from  overhead.  I  had  heard 
it — where,  or  whence,  for  ever  impossible  to  know  1  And  it  was  the 
voice  of  a  human  being — a  known,  loved,  well-remembered  voice — 
that  of  Edward  Fairfax  Rochester ;  and  it  spoke  in  pain  and  woe, 
wildly,  eerily,  urgently. 

"I  am  coming  !"  I  cried.  "Wait  for  me  !  Oh,  I  will  come  !" 
I  flew  to  the  door  and  looked  into  the  passage ;  it  was  dark.  I  ran 
out  into  the  garden  ;  it  was  void. 

"  Where  are  you  1 "  I  exclaimed. 

The  hills  beyond  Marsh  Glen  sent  the  answer  faintly  back, 
"Where  are  you?"  I  listened.  The  wind  sighed  low  in  the  firs; 
all  was  moorland  loneliness  and  midnight  hush. 

J.  9 


130  appendix 

2.    Burke 
Passage  from  Thoughts  on  the  FrevrJi  Revolution 

It  is  now  sixteen  or  seventeen  years  since  I  saw  the  queen  of 
France,  then  the  Dauphiness,  at  Versailles ;  and  surely  never  lighted 
on  this  orb,  which  she  hardly  seemed  to  touch,  a  more  delightful 
vision,  I  saw  her  just  above  the  horizon,  decorating  and  cheering 
the  elevated  sphere  she  just  began  to  move  in, — glittering  like  the 
morning  star,  full  of  life,  and  splendour,  and  joy.  Oh  1  what  a 
revolution !  and  what  a  heart  must  I  have  to  contemplate  without 
emotion  that  elevation  and  that  fall  1  Little  did  I  dream  when  she 
added  titles  of  veneration  to  those  of  enthusiastic,  distant,  respectful 
love,  that  she  should  ever  be  obliged  to  carry  the  sharp  antidote 
against  disgrace  concealed  in  that  bosom ;  little  did  I  dream  that 
I  should  have  lived  to  see  such  disasters  fallen  upon  her  in  a  nation 
of  gallant  men,  in  a  nation  of  men  of  honour  and  of  cavaliers. 
I  thought  ten  thousand  swords  must  have  leaped  from  their  scab- 
bards  to  avenge  even  a  look  that  threatened  her  with  insult. 

But  the  age  of  chivalry  is  gone.  That  of  sophisters,  economists 
and  calculators,  has  succeeded ;  and  the  glory  of  Europe  is  extin- 
guished for  ever.  Never,  never  more  shall  we  behold  that  generous 
loyalty  to  rank  and  sex,  that  proud  submission,  that  dignified 
obedience,  that  subordination  of  the  heart,  which  kept  alive,  even 
in  servitude  itself,  the  spirit  of  an  exalted  freedom.  The  unbought 
grace  of  life,  the  cheap  defence  of  nations,  the  nurse  of  manly 
sentiment  and  heroic  enterprise,  is  gone!  It  is  gone,  that  sensi- 
bility of  principle,  that  chastity  of  honour,  which  felt  a  stain  like 
a  wound,  which  inspired  courage  whilst  it  mitigated  ferocity,  which 
ennobled  whatever  it  touched,  and  under  which  vice  itself  lost  half 
its  evil,  by  losing  all  its  grossness. 

3.    Calverley 
Contentment 
(After  the  Manner  of  Horace)  * 
Friend,  there  be  they  on  whom  mishap 

Or  never  or  so  rarely  comes. 
That,  when  they  think  thereof,  they  snap 
Derisive  thumbs  ; 
*  Reproduced  from  Calverley's  Fly  Leaves  by  kind  permission  of  the 
publishers,  Messrs  George  Bell  and  Sons. 


ORDINARY   SPELLING   OF   PIECES   TRANSCRIJJED      131 

And  there  be  they  who  lightly  lose 

Their  all,  yet  feel  no  aching  void  ; 
Should  aught  annoy  them,  they  refuse 

To  be  annoy'd ; 

And  fain  would  I  be  e'en  as  these  ! 

Life  is  with  such  all  beer  and  skittles; 
They  are  not  difficult  to  please 

About  their  victuals ; 

The  trout,  the  grouse,  the  early  pea, 

By  such,  if  there,  are  freely  taken ; 
If  not,  they  munch  with  equal  glee 

Their  bit  of  bacon  ; 

Aad  when  they  wax  a  little  gay 

And  chaff  the  public  after  luncheon, 
If  they're  confronted  with  a  stray 

Policeman's  truncheon, 

Tliey  gaze  thereat  with  outstretch'd  necks. 
And  laughter  which  no  threats  can  smother, 

And  tell  the  horror-stricken  X 
That  he's  another. 

In  snowtime  if  they  cross  a  spot 

Where  unsuspected  boys  have  slid. 
They  fall  not  down — though  they  would  not 

Mind  if  they  did  ; 

"When  the  spring  rosebud  which  they  wear 
Breaks  short  and  tumbles  from  its  stem, 
,  No  thought  of  being  angry  e'er 
Dawns  upon  them  ; 

Though  'twas  Jemima's  hand  that  placed, 
(As  well  you  ween)  at  evening's  hour, 

In  the  loved  button-hole  that  chaste 
And  cherish'd  flower. 

And  when  they  travel,  if  they  find 
That  they  have  left  their  pocket-compass 

Or  Murray  or  thick  boots  behind. 
They  raise  no  rumpus, 

9—2 


132  APPENDIX 

But  plod  serenely  on  without ; 

Knowing  it's  better  to  endure 
The  evil  which  beyond  all  doubt 

You  cannot  cure. 

When  for  that  early  train  they're  late, 
They  do  not  make  their  woes  the  text 

Of  sermons  in  the  TinieSy  but  wait 
On  for  the  next ; 

And  jump  inside,  and  only  grin 

Should  it  appear  that  that  dry  wag, 

The  guard,  omitted  to  put  in 
Their  carpet-bag. 


4.    Scott 
Hunting  Song 

Waken,  lords  and  ladies  gay. 

On  the  mountain  dawns  the  day; 

All  the  jolly  chase  is  here 

With  hawk,  and  horse,  and  hunting-spear  I 

Hounds  are  in  their  couples  yelling. 

Hawks  are  whistUng,  horns  are  knelling; 

Merrily,  merrily  mingle  they, 

"Waken,  lords  and  ladies  gay." 

Waken,  lords  and  ladies  gay, 

The  mist  has  left  the  mountain  grey; 

Springlets  in  the  dawn  are  steaming. 

Diamonds  on  the  brake  are  gleaming; 

And  foresters  have  busy  been 

To  track  the  buck  in  thicket  green ; 

Now  we  come  to  chant  our  lay, 

"Waken,  lords  and  ladies  gay." 

Waken,  lords  and  ladies  gay. 

To  the  greenwood  haste  away; 

We  can  show  you  where  he  lies,  ^ 

Fleet  of  foot  and  tall  of  size  ;  '     ^ 

sc 


ORDINARY  SPELLING   OF  PIECES  TRANSCRIBED      133 

"We  can  show  the  marks  he  made, 
When  'gainst  the  oak  his  antlers  frayed ; 
You  shall  see  him  brought  to  bay, 
"Waken,  lords  and  ladies  gay." 
Louder,  louder  chant  the  lay. 
Waken,  lords  and  ladies  gay! 
Tell  them,  youth,  and  mirth,  and  glee 
Run  a  course,  as  well  as  wo ; 
Time,  stern  huntsman  !   who  pan  baulk, 
Staunch  as  hound,  and  fleet  as  hawk; 
Think  of  this,  and  rise  with  day. 
Gentle  lords  and  ladies  gay. 

5.    Thackeray 
Passage  from  the  Essay  on  Whitebait 

I  was  recently  talking  in  a  very  touching  and  poetical  strain 
about  the  above  delicate  fish  to  my  friend  Foozle  and  some  others 
at  the  club,  and  expatiating  upon  the  excellence  of  the  dinner 
which  our  little  friend  Guttlebury  had  given  us,  when  Foozle, 
looking  round  about  him  with  an  air  of  triumph  and  immense 
wisdom,  said, — 

"  I'll  tell  you  what,  Wagstaff,  I'm  a  plain  man,  and  despise  all 
your  gormandizing  and  kickshaws.  I  don't  know  the  difierence 
between  one  of  your  absurd  made  dishes  and  another ;  give  me  a 
plain  cut  of  mutton  or  beef.  I'm  a  plain  Englishman,  I  am,  and  no 
glutton." 

Foozle,  I  say,  thought  this  speech  a  terrible  set-down  for  me ; 
and  indeed  ^cted  up  to  his  principles.  You  may  see  him  any  day 
at  six  sitting  down  before  a  great  reeking  joint  of  meat ;  his  eyes 
quivering,  his  face  red,  and  he  cutting  great  smoking  red  collops 
out  of  the  beef  before  him,  which  he  devours  with  corresponding 
quantities  of  cabbage  and  potatoes,  and  the  other  gratis  luxuries  of 
the  club-table. 

What  I  complain  of  is,  not  that  the  man  should  enjoy  his  great 
meal  of  steaming  beef— let  him  be  happy  over  that  as  much  as  the 
beef  he  is  devouring  was  in  life  happy  over  oil-cakes  or  mangel- 
wurzel — but  I  hate  the  fellow's  brutal  self-complacency,  and  his 
scorn  of  other  people  who  have  different  tastes  from  his.     A  man 


134  APPENDIX 

who  brags  regarding  himself,  that  whatever  he  swallows  is  the 
same  to  him,  and  that  his  coarse  palate  recognizes  no  difference 
between  venison  and  turtle,  pudding,  or  mutton-broth,  as  his 
indifferent  jaws  close  over  them,  brags  about  a  personal  defect — 
the  wretch — and  not  about  a  virtue.  It  is  like  a  man  boasting 
that  he  has  no  ear  for  music,  or  no  eye  for  colour,  or  that  his  nose 
cannot  scent  the  difference  between  a  rose  and  a  cabbage.  I  say, 
as  a  general  rule,  set  that  man  down  as  a  conceited  fellow  who 
swaggers  about  not  caring  for  his  dinner. 

Why  shouldn't  wo  care  about  it  ?  Was  eating  not  made  to  be  a 
pleasure  to  us?  Yes,  I  say,  a  daily  pleasure — a  sweet  solamen — 
a  pleasure  familiar,  yet  ever  new  ;  the  same,  and  yet  how  different ! 
It  is  one  of  the  causes  of  domesticity.  The  neat  dinner  makes  the 
husband  pleased,  the  housewife  happy;  the  children  consequently 
are  well  brought  up,  and  love  their  papa  and  mamma.  A  good 
dinner  is  the  centre  of  the  circle  of  the  social  sympathies.  It  warms 
acquaintanceship  into  friendship ;  it  maintains  that  friendship 
comfortably  unimpaired ;  enemies  meet  over  it  and  are  reconciled. 
How  many  of  you,  dear  friends,  has  that  late  bottle  of  claret 
warmed  into  affectionate  forgiveness,  tender  recollections  of  old 
times,  and  ardent  glowing  anticipations  of  new  !  The  brain  is  a 
tremendous  secret.  I  believe  some  chemist  will  arise  anon  who 
will  know  how  to  doctor  the  brain  as  they  do  the  body  now,  as 
Liebig  doctors  the  ground.  They  will  apply  certain  medicines,  and 
produce  crops  of  certain  qualities  that  are  lying  dormant  now  for 
want  of  intellectual  guano.  But  this  is  a  subject  for  future  specu- 
lation— a  parenthesis  growing  out  of  another  parenthesis  ;  what 
I  would  urge  especially  here  is  a  point  which  must  be  familiar  with 
every  person  accustomed  to  eat  good  dinners — namely,  the  noble 
and  friendly  qualities  that  they  elicit.  How  is  it  we  cut  such  jokes 
over  them  ?  How  is  it  wo  become  so  remarkably  friendly  ?  How 
is  it  that  some  of  us,  insjured  by  a  good  dinner,  have  sudden  gusts 
of  genius  unknown  in  the  quiet  unfestive  state  ?  Some  men  make 
speeches  ;  some  shake  their  neighbour  by  the  hand,  and  invite  him 
or  themselves  to  dine  ;  some  sing  prodigiously  ;  my  friend  Saladin, 
for  instance,  goes  home,  he  says,  with  the  most  beautiful  harmonies 
ringing  in  his  ears  ;  and  I,  for  my  part,  will  take  any  given  tune, 
and  make  variations  upon  it  for  any  given  period  of  hours,  greatly, 
no  doubt,  to  the  delight  of  all  hearers.  These  are  only  temporary 
inspirations  given  us  by  the  jolly  genius,  but  arc  they  to  be  despised 


ORDINARY   SPELLING   OF   PIECES   TRANSCRIBED      135 

on  that  account  ?   No.    Good  dinners  have  been  the  greatest  vehicles 
of  benevolence  since  man  began  to  eat. 

A  taste  for  good  living,  then,  is  praiseworthy  in  moderation — 
like  all  the  other  qualities  and  endowments  of  man.  If  a  man  were 
to  neglect  his  family  or  his  business  on  account  of  his  love  for  the 
fiddle  or  the  fine  arts,  he  would  commit  just  the  crime  that  the 
dinner-sensualist  is  guilty  of ;  but  to  enjoy  wisely  is  a  maxim  of 
which  no  man  need  be  ashamed.  But  if  you  cannot  eat  a  dinner  of 
herbs  as  well  as  a  stalled  ox,  then  you  are  an  unfortunate  man  ; 
your  love  for  good  dinners  has  passed  the  wholesome  boundary,  and 
degenerated  into  gluttony. 


6.    Wordsworth 

I  wandered  lonely  as  a  cloud 

That  floats  on  high  o'er  vales  and  hills, 

When  all  at  once  I  saw  a  crowd, 

A  host  of  golden  dafibdils ; 

Ijcside  the  lake,  beneath  the  trees, 

Fluttering  and  dancing  in  the  breeze. 

Continuous  as  the  stars  that  shine 

And  twinkle  on  the  milky  way, 

They  stretched  in  never-ending  line 

Along  the  margin  of  a  bay ; 

Ten  thousand  saw  I  at  a  glance, 

Tossing  their  heads  in  sprightly  dance. 

The  waves  beside  them  danced,  but  they 

Outdid  the  sparkling  waves  in  glee ; 

A  ^oet  could  not  but  be  gay 

In  such  a  jocund  company; 

I  gazed — and  gazed — but  little  thought 

What  wealth  the  show  to  me  had  brought. 

For  oft  when  on  my  couch  I  lie 

In  vacant  or  in  pensive  mood. 

They  flash  upon  that  inward  eye 

AVhich  is  the  bliss  of  solitude; 

And  then  my  heart  with  pleasure  fills, 

And  dances  with  the  dafibdils. 


136  appendix 

7.    Dickens 
Passage  from  the  Pickwick  Papers 

The  stranger,  meanwhile,  had  been  eating,  drinking,  and  talking, 
without  cessation.  At  every  good  stroke  he  expressed  his  satis- 
faction and  approval  of  the  player  in  a  most  condescending  and 
patronising  manner,  which  could  not  fail  to  have  been  highly 
gratifying  to  the  party  concerned  ;  while  at  every  bad  attempt  at 
a  catch,  and  every  failure  to  stop  the  ball,  he  launched  his  personal 
displeasure  at  the  head  of  the  devoted  individual  in  such  denuncia- 
tions as  "Ah,  ah! — stupid" — "Now,  butter-fingers" — "Muflf" — 
"  Humbug  " — and  so  forth — ejaculations  which  seemed  to  establish 
him  in  the  opinion  of  all  around,  as  a  most  excellent  and  undeniable 
judge  of  the  whole  art  and  mystery  of  the  noble  game  of  cricket. 

"  Capital  game — well  played — some  strokes  admirable,"  said  the 
stranger,  as  both  sides  crowded  into  the  tent,  at  the  conclusion  of 
the  game. 

"  You  have  played  it,  sir  ? "  inquired  Mr  Wardle,  who  had  been 
much  amused  by  his  loquacity. 

"  Played  it !  Think  I  have — thousands  of  times — not  here — 
West  Indies— exciting  thing — hot  work — very." 

"  It  must  be  rather  a  warm  pursuit  in  such  a  climate,"  observed 
Mr  Pickwick. 

"  Warm ! — red  hot — scorching — glowing.  Played  a  match  once — 
single  wicket — friend  the  Colonel— Sir  Thomas  Blazo — who  should 
get  the  greatest  number  of  nms. — Won  the  toss — first  innings — 
seven  o'clock  a.m. — six  natives  to  look  out — went  in  ;  kept  in — 
heat  intense — natives  all  fainted — taken  away — fresh  half-dozen 
ordered — fainted  also — Blazo  bowling — supported  by  two  natives — 
couldn't  bowl  me  out— fainted  too — cleared  away  the  Colonel — 
wouldn't  give  in — faithful  attendant — Quanko  Samba — last  man 
left — sun  so  hot,  bat  in  blisters — ball  scorched  brown — five  hundred 
and  seventy  runs — rather  exhausted — Quanko  mustered  up  last 
remaining  strength — bowled  me  out — had  a  bath,  and  went  out  to 
dinner." 

"And  what  became  of  what's-his-name,  sir?"  inquired  an  old 
gentleman. 

"Blazo?" 

"  No — the  other  gentleman." 


ORDINARY  SPELLING  OF   PIECES  TRANSCRIBED      137 

"Quanko  Samba?" 

"Yes,  sir." 

"  Poor  Quanko — never  recovered  it — bowled  on,  on  my  account — 
bowled  off,  on  his  own — died,  sir."  Here  the  stranger  buried  his 
countenance  in  a  brown  jug,  but  whether  to  hide  his  emotion  or 
imbibe  its  contents,  we  cannot  distinctly  affirm.  We  only  know 
that  he  paused  suddenly,  drew  a  long  and  deep  breath,  and  looked 
anxiously  on,  as  two  of  the  principal  members  of  the  Dingley  Dell 
club  approached  Mr  Pickwick,  and  said — 

"  We  are  about  to  partake  of  a  plain  dinner  at  the  Blue  Lion, 
sir ;  we  hope  you  and  your  friends  will  join  us." 

"  Of  course,"  said  Mr  Wardle,  "  among  our  friends  we  include 
Mr "  and  he  looked  towards  the  stranger. 

"  Jingle,"  said  that  versatile  gentleman,  taking  the  hint  at  once. 
"  Jingle — Alfred  Jingle,  Esq.  of  No  Hall,  Nowhere." 

"  1  shall  be  very  happy,  I  am  sure,"  said  Mr  Pickwick. 

"So  shall  I,"  said  Mr  Alfred  Jingle,  drawing  one  arm  through 
Mr  Pickwick's,  and  another  through  Mr  Wardle's,  as  he  whispered 
confidentially  in  the  ear  of  the  former  gentleman  : — 

"  Devilish  good  dinner — cold,  but  capital — peeped  into  the  room 
this  morning— fowls  and  pies,  and  all  that  sort  of  thing— pleasant 
fellows  these — well  behaved,  too — very." 

8.    George  Eliot 
Passage  from  the  Mill  on  the  Floss 

"Oh,  I  say,  Maggie,"  said  Tom  at  last,  lifting  up  the  stand, 
"we  must  keep  quiet  here,  you  know.  If  we  break  anything, 
IVIrs  Stelling  '11  make  us  cry  peccavi." 

"What's  that?"  said  Maggie. 

"  Oh,  it's  the  Latin  for  a  good  scjolding,"  said  Tom,  not  without 
some  pride  in  his  knowledge. 

"  Is  she  a  cross  woman?"  said  Maggie. 

"  I  believe  you  ! "  said  Tom,  with  an  emphatic  nod. 

"  I  think  all  women  are  crosser  than  men,"  said  Maggie.  "Aunt 
Glegg's  a  great  deal  crosser  than  Uncle  Glegg,  and  mother  scolds 
me  more  than  father  does." 

"  Well,  you'll  be  a  woman  some  day,"  said  Tom,  "  so  i/ou  needn't 
talk." 


138  APPENDIX 

"  But  I  shall  be  a  clever  woman,"  said  Maggie,  with  a  toss. 

"  Oh,  I  daresay,  and  a  nasty  conceited  thing.  Everybody  '11  hate 
you." 

"But  you  oughtn't  to  hate  me,  Tom ;  it'll  be  very  wicked  of  you, 
for  I  shall  be  your  sister." 

"Yes,  but  if  you're  a  nasty  disagreeable  thing,  I  ihall  hate  you." 

"  Oh  but,  Tom,  you  won't !  I  shan't  be  disagreeable.  I  shall 
be  very  good  to  you — and  I  shall  be  good  to  everybody.  You  won't 
hate  me  really,  will  you,  Tom  % " 

"  Oh,  bother !  never  mind  1  Come,  it's  time  for  me  to  learn  my 
lessons.  See  here  !  what  I've  got  to  do,"  said  Tom,  drawing  Maggie 
towards  him  and  showing  her  his  theorem,  while  she  pushed  her 
hair  behind  her  ears,  and  prepared  herself  to  prove  her  capability 
of  helping  him  in  Euclid.  She  began  to  read  with  full  confidence 
in  her  own  powers,  but  presently,  becoming  quite  bewildered,  her 
face  flushed  with  irritation.  It  was  unavoidable — she  must  confess 
her  incompetency,  and  she  was  not  fond  of  humiliation. 

"  It's  nonsense  ! "  she  said,  *  and  very  ugly  stuft'— nobody  need 
want  to  make  it  out." 

"Ah,  there  now.  Miss  Maggie!"  said  Tom,  drawing  the  book 
away,  and  wagging  his  head  at  her,  "  you  see  you're  not  so  clever  as 
you  thought  you  were." 

"  Oh,"  said  Maggie,  pouting,  "  I  daresay  I  could  make  it  out,  if 
I'd  learned  what  goes  before,  as  you  have." 

"  But  that's  what  you  just  couldn't,  Miss  Wisdom,"  said  Tom. 
"  For  it's  all  the  harder  when  you  know  what  goes  before ;  for  then 
you've  got  to  say  what  definition  3  is,  and  what  axiom  V.  is.  But 
get  along  with  you  now ;  I  must  go  on  with  this.  Here's  the  Latin 
Grammar.     See  what  you  can  make  of  that." 

9.    E.  F.  Benson 
Passage  from  Bodo^ 

At  this  moment  a  shrill  voice  called  Dodo  from  the  drawing-room. 

"Dodo,  Dodo,"  it  cried,  "the  man  brought  me  two  tepid  poached 
eggs  !  Do  send  me  something  else.  Is  there  such  a  thing  as  a 
grilled  bone  ? " 

'  Eeproduced  by  kind  permission  of  Mr  Beusou  and  his  publishers, 
Jlessrs  Methuen, 


ORDINARY  SPELLING  OF   PIECES   TRANSCRIBED      130 

These  remarks  were  speedily  followed  up  by  the  appearance  of 
Miss  Staines  at  the  dining-room  door.  In  one  hand  she  held  the 
despised  eggs,  in  the  other  a  quire  of  music  paper.  Behind  her 
followed  a  footman  with  her  breakfast-tray,  in  excusable  ignorance 
as  to  what  was  required  of  him. 

"Dear  Dodo,"  she  went  on,  "you  know  when  I'm  composing  a 
symphony  I  want  something  more  exciting  than  two  poached  eggs. 
Mr  Broxton,  I  know,  will  take  my  side.  You  couldn't  eat  poached 
eggs  at  a  ball — could  you  1  They  might  do  very  well  for  a  funeral 
march  or  a  nocturne,  but  they  won't  do  for  a  symphony,  especially 
for  the  scherzo.  A  brandy-and-soda  and  a  grilled  bone  is  what  one 
really  wants  for  a  scherzo,  only  that  would  be  quite  out  of  the 
question." 

Edith  Staines  talked  in  a  loud,  determined  voice,  and  emphasized 
her  points  with  little  dashes  and  flourishes  of  the  (iish  of  poached 
eggs.  At  this  moment  one  of  them  flew  on  to  the  floor  and 
exploded.  But  it  is  an  ill  wind  that  blows  nobody  any  good,  and 
at  any  rate  this  relieved  the  footman  from  his  state  of  indecision. 
His  immediate  mission  was  clearly  to  remove  it. 

Dodo  threw  herself  back  in  her  chair  with  a  peal  of  laughter. 

"Go  on,  go  on,"  she  cried,  "you  are  too  splendid.  Tell  us  what 
70U  write  the  presto  on." 

"I  can't  waste  another  moment,"  said  Edith.  "I'm  in  the 
middle  of  the  most  entrancing  motif,  which  is  working  out  beauti- 
fully. Do  you  mind  my  smoking  in  the  drawing-room  ?  I  am 
awfully  sorry,  but  it  makes  all  the  difference  to  my  work.  Burn  a 
little  incense  there  afterwards.  Do  send  me  a  bone,  Dodo.  Come 
ai\d  hear  me  play  the  scherzo  later  on.  It's  the  best  thing  I've 
ever  done.  Oh,  by  the  way,  I  telegraphed  to  Herr  Truffcn  to  come 
to-morrow — he's  my  conductor,  you  know.  You  can  put  him  up  in 
the  village  or  the  coal-hole,  if  you  like.  He's  quite  happy  if  he  gets 
enough  beer.  He's  my  German  conductor,  you  know.  I  made  him 
entirely.  I  took  him  to  the  Princess  the  other  day  when  I  was  at 
Aix,  and  we  all  had  beer  together  in  the  verandah  of  the  Beau  Site. 
You'll  be  amused  with  him." 

"  Oh,  rather,"  said  Dodo  ;  "  that  will  be  all  right.  He  can  sleep 
in  the  house.  Will  he  come  early  to-morrow  ?  Let's  see — to-morrow's 
Sunday.  Edith,  I've  got  an  idea.  We'll  have  a  dear  little  service 
in  the  house — we  can't  go  to  church  if  it  snows — and  you  shall  play 
your  mass,  and  Herr  What's-his-name  shall  conduct,  and  Bertie, 


140  APPENDIX 

and  Grantie,  and  you  and  I  will  sing.  Won't  it  be  lovely  ?  You 
and  I  will  settle  all  that  this  afternoon.  Telegraph  to  Truffler,  or 
whatever  his  name  is,  to  come  by  the  eight-twenty.  Then  he'll  be 
here  by  twelve,  and  we'll  have  the  service  at  a  quarter  past." 

"Dodo,  that  will  be  grand,"  said  Edith.  "I  can'c  wait  now. 
Goodbye.     Hurry  up  my  breakfast — I'm  awfully  sharp-set." 

Edith  went  back  to  the  drawing-room,  whistling  in  a  particularly 
shrill  manner. 

10.    Byron 

Passage  from  Ghilde  Harold 

Oh!  that  the  desert  were  my  dwelling-place, 

With  one  fair  Spirit  for  my  minister, 
That  I  might  all  forget  the  human  race. 

And,  hating  no  one,  love  but  only  her! 
Ye  Elements ! — in  whose  ennobling  stir 

I  feel  myself  exalted — Can  ye  not 
Accord  me  such  a  being?    Do  I  err 

In  deeming  such  inhabit  many  a  spot? 
Though  with  them  to  converse  can  rarely  be  our  lot. 
There  is  a  pleasure  in  the  pathless  woods, 

There  is  a  rapture  on  the  lonely  shore, 
There  is  society  where  none  intrudes. 

By  the  deep  Sea,  and  music  in  its  roar; 
I  love  not  man  the  less,  but  Nature  more, 

From  these  our  interviews,  in  which  I  steal 
From  all  I  may  be,  or  have  been  before. 

To  mingle  with  the  Universe,  and  feel 
What  I  can  ne'er  express,  yet  cannot  all  conceal 
Rnll  on,  thou  deep  and  dark  blue  Ocean— roll  1 

Ten  thousand  fleets  sweep  over  thee  in  vain ; 
Man  marks  the  earth  with  ruin — his  control 

Stops  with  the  shore; — upon  the  watery  plain 
The  wrecks  are  all  thy  deed,  nor  doth  remain 

A  shadow  of  man's  ravage,  save  his  own. 
When,  for  a  moment,  like  a  drop  of  rain. 

He  sinks  into  thy  depths  with  bubbling  groan, 
Without  a  grave,  unknelled,  uncoffined,  and  unknown. 


ordinary  spelling  of  pieces  transcribed    141 

11.    Gladstone 

Peroration  of  the  Speech  on  the  Second  Reading 
of  the  Reform  Bill  of  1866 

May  I  say  to  honourable  gentlemen  opposite,  as  some  of  theui 
have  addressed  advice  to  gentlemen  on  this  side  of  the  House, 
"Will  you  not  consider  before  you  embark  in  this  new  crusade 
whether  the  results  of  the  others  in  which  you  have  engaged  have 
been  so  satisfactory  1 "  Great  battles  you  have  fought,  and  fought 
them  manfully.  The  battle  of  maintaining  civil  disabilities  on 
account  of  religious  belief,  the  battle  of  resisting  the  first  Reform 
Act,  the  battle  of  Protection,  all  these  great  battles  have  been 
fought  by  the  great  party  that  I  see  opposite ;  and  as  to  some  of 
them  I  admit  my  own  share  of  the  responsibility.  But  have  their 
results  been  such  as  that  you  should  be  disposed  to  renew  these 
attacks  again  ?  Certainly  those  who  sit  on  this  side  have  no  reason 
or  title  to  find  fault.  The  effect  of  your  course  has  been  to  give 
them  for  five  out  of  six,  or  for  six  out  of  seven  years,  the  conduct 
and  management  of  public  affairs.  The  effect  has  been  to  lower,  to 
reduce,  and  contract  your  just  influence  in  the  country,  and  to 
abridge  your  share  in  the  administration  of  the  Government.  It 
is  good  for  the  public  interest  that  you  should  be  strong ;  but  if 
you  are  to  be  strong,  you  can  only  be  so  by  showing,  as  well  as  the 
kindness  and  the  personal  generosity  which  I  am  sure  you  feel 
towards  the  people,  a  public  trust  and  confidence  in  them.  What 
I  say  now  can  hardly  be  said  with  an  evil  motive. 

But,  sir,  we  are  assailed  ;  this  Bill  is  in  a  state  of  crisis  and  of 
peril,  and  the  Government  along  with  it.  We  stand  or  fall  with 
it  as  has  been  declared  by  my  noble  friend.  We  stand  with  it  now ; 
we  may  fall  with  it  a  short  time  hence,  and  if  we  do  we  shall  rise 
with  it  hereafter.  I  shall  not  attempt  to  measure  with  precision  the 
forces  that  are  to  be  arrayed  in  the  coming  struggle.  Perhaps  the 
great  division  of  to-night  is  not  the  last  that  must  take  place  in  the 
struggle.  You  may  possibly  succeed  at  some  point  of  the  contest. 
You  may  drive  us  from  our  seats.  You  may  bury  the  Bill  that  we 
have  introduced,  but  for  its  epitaph  we  will  write  upon  its  grave- 
stone this  line,  with  certain  confidence  in  its  fulfilment : — 

"Exoriare  aliquis  nostris  ex  ossibus  ultor." 
You  cannot  fight  against  the  future.    Time  is  on  our  side.    The 
great  social  forces  which  move  on  in  their  might  and  majesty,  and 


142  APPENDIX 

which  the  tumult  of  our  debates  does  not  for  a  raoment  impede  or 
disturb— those  great  social  forces  are  against  you ;  they  are  mar- 
shalled on  our  side,  and  the  banner  which  we  now  carry,  though 
perhaps  at  some  moment  it  may  droop  over  our  sinking  heads,  yet 
it  soon  again  will  float  in  the  eye  of  heaven,  and  it  will  be  borne  by 
the  firm  hands  of  the  united  people  of  the  three  Kingdoms,  perhaps 
not  to  an  easy,  but  to  a  certain  and  to  a  not  distant  victory. 

12.  Keats 

To  Sleep 

O  soft  embalmer  of  the  still  midnight. 

Shutting  with  careful  fingers  and  benign, 
Our  gloom-pleased  eyes,  embowered  from  the  light, 

Enshaded  in  forgetfulness  divine ; 
O  soothest  Sleep !  if  so  it  please  thee,  close. 

In  midst  of  this  thine  hymn,  my  willing  eyes, 
Or  wait  the  amen,  ere  thy  poppy  throws 

Around  my  bed  its  lulling  charities ; 

Then  save  me,  or  the  passed  day  will  shine 
Upon  my  pillow,  breeding  many  woes, — 

Save  me  from  curious  conscience,  that  still  lords 
Its  strength  for  darkness,  burrowing  like  a  mole; 

Turn  the  key  deftly  in  the  oiled  wards, 
And  seal  the  hushed  casket  of  my  souL 

13.  Milton 
At  a  Solemn  Music 

Blest  pair  of  Sirens,  pledges  of  Heaven's  joy, 

Sphere-born  harmonious  sisters.  Voice  and  Verse, 

Wed  your  divine  sounds,  and  mixed  power  employ. 

Dead  things  with  inbreathed  sense  able  to  pierce; 

And  to  our  high-raised  phantasy  present 

That  undisturbed  song  of  pure  concent. 

Aye  sung  before  the  sapphire-coloured  throne 

To  Him  that  sits  thereon, 

AVith  saintly  shout  and  solemn  jubilee ; 

AVhere  the  bright  Seraphim  in  burning  row 

Their  loud  uplifted  angel-trumpets  blow. 


ORDINARY   SPELLING   OF   PIECES   TRANSCRIBED      143 

And  the  Chenibic  host  in  thousand  quires 

Touch  their  immortal  harps  of  golden  wires, 

With  those  just  Spirits  that  wear  victorious  palms, 

Hymns  devout  and  holy  psalms 

Singing  everlastingly ; 

That  wo  on  Earth,  with  undiscording  voice, 

May  rightly  answer  that  melodious  noise ; 

As  once  we  did,  till  disproportioned  sin 

Jarred  ag;vinst  nature's  chime,  and  with  harsh  din 

Broke  the  fair  music  that  all  creatures  made 

To  their  great  Lord,  whose  love  their  motion  swayed 

In  perfect  diapason,  whilst  they  stood 

In  first  obedience,  and  their  state  of  good. 

0,  may  we  soon  again  renew  that  song, 

And  keep  in  tune  with  Heaven,  till  God  ere  long 

To  his  celestial  consort  us  unite. 

To  live  with  Him,  and  sing  in  endless  morn  of  light ! 

14.    Shakespeare 

Passage  from  Julius  Caesar 

Ant.     Friends,  Romans,  countrymen,  lend  me  your  ears ; 
I  come  to  bury  Caesar,  not  to  praise  him. 
The  evil  that  men  do  lives  after  them ; 
The  good  is  oft  interred  with  their  bones; 
So  let  it  be  with  Caesar.     The  noble  Brutua 
Hath  told  you  Caesar  was  ambitious ; 
If  it  were  so,  it  was  a  grievous  fault. 
And  grievously  hath  Caesar  answer'd  it 
Here,  under  leave  of  Brutus  and  the  rest — 
For  Brutus  is  an  honourable  man  ; 
So  are  they  all,  all  honourable  men — 
Come  I  to  speak  in  Caesar's  funeral. 
He  was  my  friend,  faithful  and  just  to  me ; 
But  Brutus  says  he  was  ambitious ; 
And  Brutus  is  an  honourable  man. 
He  hath  brought  many  captives  home  to  Rome, 
Whose  ransoms  did  the  general  coffers  fill ; 
Did  this  in  Caesar  seem  ambitious? 


144  APPENDIX 

When  that  the  poor  have  cried,  Caesar  hath  wept; 

Ambition  should  be  made  of  sterner  stuff; 

Yet  Brutus  says  he  was  ambitious ; 

And  Brutus  is  an  honourable  man. 

You  all  did  see  that  on  the  Lupercal 

I  thrice  presented  him  a  kingly  crown, 

Which  he  did  thrice  refuse  ;   was  this  ambition  ? 

Yet  Brutus  says  he  was  ambitious ; 

And,  sure,  he  is  an  honourable  man. 

I  speak  not  to  disprove  what  Brutus  spoke, 

But  here  I  am,  to  speak  what  I  do  know. 

You  all  did  love  him  once,  not  without  cause; 

What  cause  withholds  you  then,  to  mourn  for  himf 

0  judgement  1   thou  art  fled  to  brutish  beasts, 

And  men  have  lost  their  reason.     Bear  with  me; 

My  heart  is  in  the  coffin  there  with  Caesar, 

And  I  must  pause,  till  it  come  back  to  me. 

15.    Tennyson 
Lyrics  from  The  Princess 

The  splendour  falls  on  castle  walls 

And  snowy  summits  old  in  story; 
The  long  light  shakes  across  the  lakes, 
And  the  wild  cataract  leaps  in  glory. 
Blow,  bugle,  blow,  set  the  wild  echoes  flying, 
Blow,  bugle ;  answer,  echoes,  dying,  dying,  dying. 

0  hark,  0  hear !  how  thin  and  clear. 
And  thinner,  clearer,  farther  going  1 
0  sweet  and  far  from  clifi'  and  scar 
The  horns  of  Elfland  faintly  blowing ! 
Blow,  let  us  hear  the  pm-ple  glens  replying: 
Blow,  bugle ;  answer,  echoes,  dying,  dying,  dying. 
0  love,  they  die  in  yon  rich  sky. 

They  faint  on  hill  or  field  or  river; 
Oar  echoes  roll  from  soul  to  soul. 
And  grow  for  ever  and  for  ever. 
Blow,  bugle,  blow,  set  the  wild  echoes  flying. 
And  answer,  echoes,  answer,  dying,  dying,  dying. 


ordinary  spelling  of  pieces  transcribed    145 

16.    Addison 

Passage  from  Sir  Roger  de  Coverleys  country  residence 
and  friends 

I  have  observed  in  several  of  my  papers,  that  my  friend  Sir 
Roger,  amidst  all  his  good  qualities,  is  something  of  a  humorist, 
and  that  his  virtues,  as  well  as  imperfections,  are  as  it  were  tinged 
by  a  certain  extravagance,  which  makes  them  particularly  his,  and 
distinguishes  them  from  those  of  other  men.  This  cast  of  mind,  as 
it  is  generally  very  innocent  in  itself,  so  it  renders  his  conversation 
highly  agreeable,  and  more  delightful  than  the  same  degree  of  sense 
and  virtue  would  appear  in  their  common  and  ordinary  colours. 
As  I  was  walking  with  him  last  night,  he  asked  me  how  I  liked  the 
good  man  whom  I  have  just  now  mentioned ;  and  without  staying 
for  my  answer,  told  me  that  he  was  afraid  of  being  insulted  with 
Latin  and  Greek  at  his  own  table ;  for  which  reason  he  desired  a 
particular  friend  of  his  at  the  university  to  find  him  out  a  clergyman 
rather  of  plain  sense  than  much  learning,  of  a  good  aspect,  a  clear 
voice,  a  sociable  temper,  and,  if  possible,  a  man  that  understood  a 
little  of  backgammon.  "  My  friend,"  says  Sir  Roger,  "  found  me 
out  this  gentleman,  who,  besides  the  endowments  required  of  him, 
is,  they  tell  me,  a  good  scholar,  though  he  does  not  show  it.  I  have 
given  him  the  parsonage  of  the  parish;  and  because  I  know  his 
value,  have  settled  upon  him  a  good  annuity  for  life.  If  he  outlives 
me,  he  shall  find,  that  he  was  higher  in  my  esteem  than  perhaps  he 
thinks  he  is.  He  has  now  been  with  me  thirty  years  and  though 
he  does  not  know  I  have  taken  notice  of  it,  has  never  in  all  that 
time  a.sked  anything  of  me  for  himself,  though  he  is  every  day 
soliciting  me  for  something  in  behalf  of  one  or  other  of  my  tenants, 
his  parishioners.  There  has  not  been  a  lawsuit  in  the  parish  since 
he  has  lived  among  them ;  if  any  dispute  arises,  they  apply  them- 
selves to  him  for  the  decision  ;  if  they  do  not  acquiesce  in  his 
judgment,  which  I  think  never  happened  above  once  or  twice  at 
most,  they  appeal  to  me.  At  his  first  settling  with  me,  I  made  him 
a  present  of  all  the  good  sermons  which  have  been  printed  in 
English,  and  only  begged  of  him,  that  every  Sunday  he  would 
pronounce  one  of  them  in  the  pulpit.  Accordingly  he  has  digested 
them  into  such  a  series,  that  they  follow  one  another  naturally,  and 
make  a  continued  system  of  practical  divinity." 

J.  10 


146  APPENDIX 

17.    Fuhrken-Jespersen-Eodhe 

Anecdote  from  Engelsk  LcLsebok 
The  telegraph  explained 

To  explain  simply  the  working  of  the  wondrous  telegraph  is  a 
puzzle  for  the  philosopher ;  and  no  wonder  simple  folks  come  to 
grief  over  the  task.  The  following  is  the  explanation  given  to  his 
fellow  by  an  Italian  peasant. 

"  Don't  you  see  those  poles  and  wires  that  run  along  beside  the 
railway?" 

"  I  know  that  is  the  telegraph  ;  but  how  does  it  work  ?" 

"  Nothing  more  simple ;  you  have  only  to  touch  one  end  of  the 
wire,  and  click — the  other  end  writes  it  down  just  the  same  as  a 
pen." 

"  Still,  I  don't  quite  see  how  it's  done." 

"  Let  me  try  to  make  it  plain.     Have  you  a  dog  ?" 

"Yes." 

"  What  does  he  do  if  you  pinch  his  tail  ? " 

"  Bark,  to  be  sure." 

"Well  then,  supposing  your  dog  were  long  enough  to  reach  in 
body  from  Florence  here  to  the  capital." 

"Well?" 

**  It  is  clear  then  that  if  you  pinch  his  tail  in  Florence  ho  will 
bark  in  Rome.  There,  friend,  that's  exactly  how  the  electric  tele- 
graph works." 

18.    Goldsmith 

Passage  from  Beau  Tibhs  at  Vauschall 

I  was  going  to  second  his  remarks,  when  we  were  called  to  a 
consultation  by  Mr  Tibbs  and  the  rest  of  the  company,  to  know  in 
what  manner  we  were  to  lay  out  the  evening  to  the  greatest  ad- 
vantage. Mrs  Tibbs  was  for  keeping  the  genteel  walk  of  the  garden, 
where,  she  observed,  there  was  always  the  very  best  company ;  the 
widow,  on  the  contrary,  who  came  but  once  a  season,  was  for  securing 
a  good  standing-place  to  see  the  waterworks,  which  she  assured  us 
would  begin  in  less  than  an  hour  at  furthest ;  a  dispute  therefore 
began,  and  as  it  was  managed  between  two  of  very  opposite  cha- 
racters, it  threatened  to  grow  more  bitter  at  every  reply.    Mrs  Tibbs 


ORDINARY  SPELLING   OF  PIECES   TRANSCRIBED      147 

wondered  how  people  could  pretend  to  know  the  polite  world,  who 
had  received  all  their  rudiments  of  breeding  behind  a  counter  ;  to 
which  the  other  replied,  that  though  some  people  sat  behind  counters, 
yet  they  could  sit  at  the  head  of  their  own  tables  too,  and  carve 
three  good  dishes  of  hot  raeat  whenever  they  thought  proper ; — which 
was  more  than  some  people  could  say  for  themselves,  that  hardly 
knew  a  rabbit  and  onions  from  a  green  goose  and  gooseberries. 

It  is  hard  to  say  where  this  might  have  ended,  had  not  the 
husband,  who  probably  knew  the  impetuosity  of  his  wife's  dis- 
position, proposed  to  end  the  dispute  by  adjourning  to  a  box,  and 
try  if  there  was  anything  to  be  had  for  supper  that  was  supportable. 

19.     Huxley 
Passage  from  Discourses  Biological  and  Geological  (p.  224)^ 

What  is  the  purpose  of  primary  intellectual  education  ?  I  appre- 
hend that  its  first  object  is  to  train  the  young  in  the  use  of  those 
tools  wherewith  men  extract  knowledge  from  the  ever-shifting 
succession  of  phenomena  which  pass  before  their  eyes ;  and  that 
its  second  object  is  to  inform  them  of  the  fundamental  laws  which 
have  been  found  by  experience  to  govern  the  course  of  things,  so 
that  they  may  not  be  turned  out  into  the  world  naked,  defenceless, 
and  a  prey  to  the  events  they  might  control. 

A  boy  is  taught  to  read  his  own  and  other  languages,  in  order 
that  he  may  have  access  to  infinitely  wider  stores  of  knowledge 
than  could  ever  be  opened  to  him  by  oral  intercourse  with  his 
fellow  men  ;  he  learns  to  write,  that  his  means  of  communication 
with  the  rest  of  mankind  may  be  indefinitely  enlarged,  and  that  he 
may  record  and  store  up  the  knowledge  he  acquires.  He  is  taught 
elementary  mathematics,  that  he  may  understand  all  those  relations 
of  number  and  form,  upon  which  the  transactions  of  men,  associated 
in  complicated  societies,  are  built,  and  that  he  may  have  some 
practice  in  deductive  reasoning. 

All  these  operations  of  reading,  writing,  and  ciphering  are 
intellectual  tools,  whose  use  should,  before  all  things,  be  learned, 
and  learned  thoroughly;  so  that  the  youth  may  be  enabled  to 
make  his  life  that  which  it  ought  to  be,  a  continual  progress  in 
learning  and  in  wisdom. 

^  Reproduced  by  kind  permission  of  the  publishers,  Messrs  Macraillan. 


148  APPENDIX 


20.    Lloyd 

A  passage  from  the  Daily  Mail,  22nd  Oct.  1897 
as  transcribed  in  Lloyd's  Northern  English 

Insects  in  Lapland 

Anyone  who  hopes  to  make  a  comfortable  journey  in  Lapland 
should  never  make  the  mistake  of  arriving  there  equipped  as  an 
ordinary  tourist.  It  is  a  country  that  abounds  in  mosquitoes  and 
knorts,  and  if  there  is  a  fly  more  persistent  than  another  it  is  a 
knort,  A  knort  is  a  small  creature  with  the  obstinacy  of  a  hundred 
mosquitoes  and  the  patience  of  ten  Jobs.  A  mosquito  heralds  his 
own  approach  with  a  menacing  buzz.  He  hovers  around,  and  if 
the  intended  victim  is  quick,  the  pest  can  be  killed,  and  easily 
killed ;  though  of  course,  if  the  creatures  attack  in  battalions,  the 
whole  number  cannot  be  slaughtered,  and  victory  must  go  to  the 
many.  The  knort,  on  the  other  hand,  is  silent  and  apparently 
harmless.  He  arrives  unobtrusively.  He  strolls  about  a  bit,  as  if 
he  were  not  in  the  least  bit  hungry,  but  only  a  little  pleasantly 
inquisitive.  What  harm  could  such  a  small  thing  do  to  your  thick 
knitted  stockings  ? 

But  the  beak  of  the  knort  is  long,  and  having  chosen  his 
rendezvous,  the  owner  of  that  beak  proceeds  to  burrow  with  it, 
with  a  result  that  is  altogether  surprising,  and  certainly  most 
painful.  The  Lapp  himself  stains  his  face  with  a  mixture  of  tar 
and  grease,  which  the  creatures  do  not  like.  Moreover  it  is  a 
fact  that  the  mosquito  and  knort  do  not  assail  the  natives  as 
they  do  strangers.  A  mask  of  this  stain,  and  a  handkerchief, 
placed  inside  the  cap  and  left  to  hang  down  behind,  are  the  native 
precaution.  But  the  tourist  thinks  of  "England,  home  and  beauty," 
and  probably  does  not  relish  disguising  his  complexion  into  that  of 
a  mulatto.  So  he  makes  himself  miserable  by  trying  to  wear  a  veil, 
something  like  a  meat-safe,  from  which  all  the  world  looks  like 
milk-and-water,  and  he  breathes  with  a  suffocating  feeling,  as  if  ho 
were  on  the  point  of  choking  or  fainting,  or  doing  something  equally 
unmanly. 


ORDINARY    SPELLING   OF   PIECES   TKANSCIUBED      149 


21.     Macaulay 

Passage  fiom  the  History  of  England 

It  would  uot  be  difficult  to  compose  a  lampoon  or  panegyric 
on  either  of  these  renowned  factions.  For  no  man  not  utterly 
destitute  of  judgment  and  candour  will  deny  that  there  are  many 
deep  stains  on  the  fame  of  the  party  to  which  he  belongs,  or  that 
the  party  to  which  he  is  opposed  may  justly  boast  of  many  illustrious 
names,  of  many  heroic  actions  and  of  many  great  services  rendered 
to  the  state.  The  truth  is  that  though  both  parties  have  often 
seriously  erred,  England  could  have  spared  neither ;  if  in  her  in- 
stitutions, freedom  and  order,  the  advantages  arising  from  innovation 
and  the  advantages  arising  from  prescription  have  been  combined  to 
an  extent  elsewhere  unknown,  we  may  attribute  this  happy  pecu- 
liarity to  the  strenuous  conflicts  and  alternate  victories  of  two  rival 
confederacies  of  statesmen. 


22.     Macaulay 

Passage  from  the  History  of  England  (on  Laud) 

The  severest  punishment  which  the  two  Houses  could  have 
inflicted  on  him  would  have  been  to  set  him  at  liberty  and  send 
him  to  Oxford.  There  he  might  have  stayed,  tortured  by  his  own 
diabolical  temper,  hungering  for  puritans  to  pillory  and  mangle, 
plaguing  the  cavaliers,  for  want  of  somebody  else  to  plague,  with 
his  peevishness  and  absurdity,  performing  grimaces  and  antics  in 
the  cathedral,  continuing  that  incomparable  diary,  which  we  never 
see  without  forgetting  the  vices  of  his  heart  in  the  imbecility  of  his 
intellect,  minuting  down  his  dreams,  counting  the  drops  of  blood 
which  fell  from  his  nose,  watchiug  the  direction  of  the  salt,  and 
listening  for  the  note  of  the  screech-owls.  Contemptuous  mercy 
was  the  only  vengeance  which  it  became  the  Parliament  to  take  on 
such  a  ridiculous  old  bigot. 

10—3 


150  APPENDIX 

23.      RUSKIN 

Passage  from  Modern  Painters 

Gather  a  single  blade  of  grass,  and  examine  for  a  minute,  quietly, 
its  narrow  sword-shaped  strip  of  fluted  green.  Nothing  as  it  seems 
there,  of  notable  goodness  or  beauty.  A  very  little  strength,  and  a 
very  little  tallness,  and  a  few  delicate  long  lines  meeting  in  a  point, 
not  a  perfect  point  neither,  but  blunt  and  unfinished,  by  no  means 
a  creditable  or  apparently  much  cared  for  example  of  nature's 
workmanship,  made  as  it  seems  only  to  be  trodden  on  to-day, 
and  to-morrow  to  be  cast  into  the  oven;  and  a  little  pale  and 
hollow  stalk,  feeble  and  flaccid,  leading  down  to  the  dull  brown 
fibres  of  roots.  And  yet,  think  of  it  well,  and  judge  whether  of 
all  the  gorgeous  flowers  that  beam  in  summer  air,  and  of  all  strong 
and  goodly  trees,  pleasant  to  the  eyes  or  good  for  food — stately 
palm  and  pine,  strong  ash  and  oak,  scented  citron,  burdened  vine— 
there  be  any  by  man  so  deeply  loved,  by  God  so  highly  graced  as 
that  narrow  point  of  feeble  green. 


24.    Scott 
A  passage  from  Old  Mortality 

Evening  lowered  around  Morton  as  he  advanced  up  the  narrow 
dell  which  must  have  once  been  a  wood,  but  was  now  a  ravine 
divested  of  trees,  unless  where  a  few  from  their  inaccessible  situation 
on  the  edge  of  precipitous  banks,  or  clinging  among  rocks  and  huge 
stones,  defied  the  invasion  of  men  and  of  cattle,  like  the  scattered 
tribes  of  a  conquered  country,  driven  to  take  refuge  in  the  barren 
strength  of  its  mountains.  These  too,  wasted  and  decayed,  seemed 
rather  to  exist  than  to  flourish,  and  only  served  to  indicate  what 
the  landscape  must  once  have  been.  But  the  stream  brawled  down 
among  them  in  all  its  freshness  and  vivacity,  giving  the  life  and 
animation  which  a  mountain  rivulet  alone  can  confer  on  the  barest 
and  most  savage  scenes,  and  which  the  inhabitants  of  such  a  country 
miss  when  gazing  even  upon  the  tranquil  winding  of  a  majestic 
stream  through  plains  of  fertility,  and  beside  palaces  of  splendour. 


ORDINARY   SPELLING   OF   PIECES  TRANSCRIBED      151 

The  track  of  the  road  followed  the  course  of  the  brook,  which  was 
now  visible,  and  now  only  to  be  distinguished  by  its  brawling  heard 
among  the  stones,  or  in  the  clefts  of  the  rocks,  that  occasionally 
interrupted  its  course. 

"Murmurer  that  thou  art,"  said  Morton,  in  the  enthusiasm  of 
his  reverie,  "why  chafe  with  the  rocks  that  stop  thy  course  for 
a  moment  ?  There  is  a  sea  to  receive  thee  in  its  bosom  ;  and  there 
is  an  eternity  for  man  when  his  fretful  and  hasty  course  through 
the  vale  of  time  shall  be  ceased  and  over.  What  thy  petty  fuming 
is  to  the  deep  and  vast  billows  of  a  shoreless  ocean,  are  our  cares, 
hopes,  fears,  joys,  and  sorrows,  to  the  objects  which  must  occupy 
us  through  the  awful  and  boundless  succession  of  ages." 

25.    Stevenson 
Passage  from  Treasure  Island 

The  appearance  of  the  island  when  I  came  on  deck  next  morning 
was  altogether  changed.  Although  the  breeze  had  now  utterly 
failed,  we  had  made  a  great  deal  of  way  during  the  night,  and  were 
now  lying  becalmed  about  half  a  mile  to  the  south-east  of  the  low 
eastern  coast.  Grey-coloured  woods  covered  a  large  part  of  the 
surface.  This  even  tint  was  indeed  broken  up  by  streaks  of  yellow 
sandbreak  in  the  lower  lands,  and  by  many  tall  trees  of  the  pine 
family,  out-topping  the  others — some  singly,  some  in  clumps ;  but 
the  general  colouring  was  uniform  and  sad.  The  hills  ran  up  clear 
above  the  vegetation  in  spires  of  naked  rock.  All  were  strangely 
shaped,  and  the  Spy-glass,  which  was  by  three  or  four  hundred 
feet  the  tallest  on  the  island,  was  likewise  the  strangest  in  con- 
figuration, running  up  sheer  from  almost  every  side,  and  then 
suddenly  cut  oft"  at  the  top  like  a  pedestal  to  put  a  statue  on. 

26.    W.  Pett  Ridge 

A  passage  from  London  Only  (pp.  9 — 12)^ 

"  I've  found  'em  ! "  said  his  landlady  exultantly,  as  he  stumbled 
into  the  narrow,  dimly  lighted  passage.  She  turned  up  the  little 
oil-lamp  standing  on  the  bracket,  and  the  oil-lamp,  annoyed,  began 

1  Reproduced  by  kind  permission  of  Mr  Pett  Ridge. 


152  APPENDIX 

to  smoke  furiously.  "  I've  found  'em,  Mr  Merrywcathcr,  and  gl.id 
enough  I  am  to  'ave  been  of  some  service  to  you."  She  was  a 
vivacious  old  lady  in  a  beaded  cap  with  a  lively  knowledge  of  the 
affairs  of  other  people,  and  just  now  keenly  interested  in  the  new 
occupant  of  her  bed-sitting-room.  "And  you  mustn't  thank  me, 
because  I'm  only  too  pleased  to  bring  friends  and  rel'tives  together." 

"iVbw  what  are  you  cacklin'  about,  ma'am  ?"  he  asked  politely. 

"Ah,"  replied  the  old  lady  cheerfully,  "you'll  soon  know.  We 
shan't  be  long  now.  It'll  be  as  good  as  a  play  to  see  you  two  meet." 
She  wept  and  rubbed  her  eyes.  "  People  may  say  what  they  like, 
but  there's  nothing  in  all  this  wide  world  to  be  compared  to  two 
loyin'  'earts." 

"  Let  me  'ave  my  supper,"  he  said  patiently,  "  and  then  leave  me 
be.     I  want  to  'ave  a  smoke  and  a  think." 

"  Fou  won't  do  much  thinking,"  remarked  the  landlady  know- 
ingly, "  when  you  'ear  the  news  I've  got  for  you.  You  said  your 
name  was  Mcrryweather,  didn't  you  ? " 

"I  don't  deny  it." 

"And  you  said  you'd  got  friends  near  'ere — you'd  forgot  the 
address." 

"  I  might  have  let  fall  a  casual  remark,"  said  Bell  carefully,  as 
he  held  the  handle  of  his  door,  "  or  statement  to  that  eflfect.  What- 
ever I  said  I'll  stick  to." 

"  I  knew  that,"  replied  the  old  landlady.  "  I  'ope  I  can  tell  a 
gentleman  from  a  mere  common  person.  Some  people  look  down 
on  sailors  and  such-like,  but  I'm  not  one  of  that  sort.  As  I  often 
say,  where  would  Old  England  be  without  'em  ! " 

"  'Urry  up  with  that  supper,"  said  Mr  Bell. 

"  Shall  I  lay  for  two,  Mr  Mcrryweather  ? "  asked  the  old  lady. 

"  Course  not !  I'm  only  one." 

"But  the  lady?" 

"What  lady?" 

"  Why,"  she  said,  "  your  wife ! "  Mr  Bell  pulled  the  handle  from 
the  door  and  stood  looking  at  her  blankly.  The  landlady  gave  a 
gesture  of  self-reproval.  "That's  me  all  over.  I  forget  what  I 
'ave  said  and  I  forget  what  I  'aven't  said.  What  I  ought  to  have 
told  you  before  blurting  it  out  like  that  was  that  I've  discovered 
your  wife,  Mrs  Mcrryweather,  in  Grundy  Street ;  that  she's  simply 
overjoyed  to  'car  of  you,  and  I've  asked  her  to  come  'ere  this 


ORDINARY   SPELLING  OP   PIECES  TRANSCRIBED      153 

"Then,"  said  Mr  Bell  solemnly,  and  shaking  the  white  door- 
handle in  the  old  lady's  face,  "you  jest  listen  to  me.  You've  asked 
her  to  come  'ere  ;  you  can  jest  jolly  well  ask  her  to  go  away  again. 
I'm  not  going  to  see  her." 

"  Well,  well,  welly"  said  the  amazed  landlady,  "  'ere's  a  pretty 
how-d'ye-do  !  And  she  talked  so  affectionate  about  you,  too,  and 
she  says,  *  Oh ! '  she  says,  '  I  do  so  long  to  look  on  my  sweet  one's 
face  again.'  I  had  the  least  drop  of  spirits  with  her,  and  we  drank 
your  good  'ealth." 

"Very  kind  of  you,"  said  Mr  Bell  doggedly,  "but  that  don't 
aifect  my  position.  When  she  comes,  you  get  rid  of  her,  and,  in 
future,  don't  go  potterin'  about  and  mixing  yourself  up  in  my  affairs, 
because  I  won't  have  it.  See?  I've  got  plenty  to  worry  about," 
added  Mr  Bell  fiercely — "more  than  you  think  for;  and  I  don't 
want  no  interforin'  old  cat —  " 

"  When  you've  quite  done  using  language,"  interrupted  the  old 
lady,  bridling,  "p'raps  you'll  kindly  put  back  that  door-'andle  where 
you  found  it.  Letting  you  my  ground-floor  front  for  a  paltry  four- 
and-six  a- week  don't  entitle  you  to  walk  about  with  bits  of  it  in 
your  'ands.  So  there,  now ! "  She  went  towards  the  kitchen, 
soliloquising.     "  Interferin'  old  cat  indeed  !     Vll  learn  him  ! " 


CAMBRi:      E:     PRINTED    BY   JOHN    CT.AY,    M.A.    AT   THK    TTNTVER8ITY   PRESS. 


WALL  CHARTS  FOR  CLASS  USE 

The  Organs  of  Speech,  an  enlargement  of  Fig.  1  in 
The  Pronunciation  of.  English.  36"  x  36".  Mounted  on  linen 
with  rollers  3s.  net.  On  paper  Is.  ijd.  net.  Cambridge  Uni- 
versity Press. 

English  Speech  Sounds,  an  enlargement  of  the  tal)le 
on  p.  xiii  of  The  Prommciation  of  English.  36"  x  36".  Mounted 
on  linen  with  rollers  3s.  net.  On  paper  Is.  Qd.  net.  Cambridge 
University  Press. 

Les  Sons  du  Fran9ais.     34"  x  44".     Mounted  on 

linen  with  rollers  3s.  net.     On  paper  Is.  Qd.  net.     Cambridge 
University  Press, 


[p.  T.  O. 


! 


BY  THE  SAME  AUTHOR 

100  Poesies  Enfantines  recueillies  et  mises  en  tian- 
scription  phonetique.  Par  D.  Jones.  Illustrations  par  E.  M. 
PuQH.  Leipzig  (Teubner),  1907.  Reli6,  2  M.  20  ;  Brochd, 
1  M.  80. 

An  Outline  of  English  Phonetics  for  foreign  stu- 
dents.   By  D.  Jones.     Leipzig  (Teubner).    In  preparation. 

Phonetic  Transcriptions  of  English  Prose.    By 

D.  Jones.    Oxford  (Clarendon  Press),  1907.     2s. 

The  Sounds  of  the  French  Language.    By  Paul 

Passy.     Translated  by  D.  L.  Savory  and  D.  Jones.     Oxford 
(Clarendon  Press),  1907.     2*.  Cc^. 

Alphabet  Organique.    Par  P.  Passy  et  D.  Jones. 

^Publie  par  1' Association  Phonetique  Internationale.     Prix  60  c. 
franco.     S'adresser  au  bureau  de  redaction. 

A  Chart  of  Enghsh  Speech  Sounds  (adapted  tof 

the  needs  of  foreigners)   with   Key   Woids    and  Notes.     By 
D.  Jones.     Oxford  (Clarendon  Press),   2nd  ed.     1909.    4.d. 

Intonation-Curves.   By  D.  Jones.   Leipzig  (Teubner). 

1909. 

Scenes  from  Shakespeare  in  the  original  pronuncia- 
tion. By  D.  Jones.  Published  by  the  International  Phonetic 
Association,  1909.  1*.  To  members  of  the  Association  Id. 
poat  free. 


All  persons  interested  in  Phonetics  are 
recommended  to  join  the 

INTERNATIONAL  PHONETIC  ASSOCIATIO: 

Subscription  2s.  lOd  per  annum 

Membei's  receive  free  of  cliarge  the  Maitre  Pho- 
netique, the  official  organ  of  the  Association  (Editor: 
P  Passy,  20  Madeleine,  Bourg-la-Rcine,  Seine,  France; 
Assistant  Editor:  D.  Jones,  University  College,  London, 
W.C). 

Prospectus  on  application 

Specimen  copy  of  the  Maitre  Phonetique,  Id.  post  tree. 

O 


eiiiuiNGi  SECT.  JAN  Z  7  1967 


PE 

1135 
J67 
19U 


Jones,  Daniel 

The  pronunciation  of 
English  2d  ed. 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 


UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY